<![CDATA[ Latest from Woman and Home in Homes ]]> https://www.womanandhome.com 2025-06-18T05:00:00Z en <![CDATA[ 8 decluttering mistakes you’re probably making – and how to avoid them ]]> When it comes to decluttering, we all have good intentions. We want to let go of items that no longer serve us, creating a cleaner, happier home as a result. But executing the process is far from easy, especially when you throw the most common decluttering mistakes into the mix.

Once you know what these mistakes are and how to avoid them, decluttering the home becomes much easier. Which in turn makes it easier to streamline your home organisation ideas and keep on top of daily cleaning habits.

Whether you're keen to try a new decluttering method or you've simply been putting off making a start, we've asked professional organisers to share the most common decluttering mistakes we're likely to make, and what to do instead.

8 common decluttering mistakes, according to professionals

Heed the advice of professional organisers to avoid the most common mistakes, and we're confident your next decluttering mission will be a success.

1. Trying to do it all at once

collage of a hallway with a rack of woven baskets for storage and inside of a bathroom drawer with products

(Image credit: Future | Joanna Henderson)

When you're in the mood to declutter, it's tempting to seize the moment and blitz through as much as possible, especially if you're someone who struggles to find the motivation to declutter most of the time.

"This is one of the biggest decluttering mistakes I see people make," comments professional organiser Rebecca Crayford. "It usually starts with good intentions, a full Saturday blitz, for example, but this can quickly lead to decision fatigue and overwhelm. When we’re exhausted, it’s far easier to shove things back in the drawer than make the call to keep, donate, or let go."

A much better approach is to start small and focus on one area at a time. I highly recommend the 1-3-5 decluttering method, where you choose one room to declutter, then break this down into three main tasks and five smaller sub-tasks. I used it to declutter my wardrobes, and it's a real game-changer.

2. Holding on to things "just in case"

white dining room with wooden dining table with alcove shelving used to store stacked magazines and glassware

(Image credit: Future | Joanna Henderson)

The "just in case" mindset is one of the biggest barriers to decluttering. I'm definitely guilty of this, justifying holding on to items that I haven't used in years with the mentality that they might come in handy one day.

"We all do it, whether it’s clothes we hope to fit into again, gifts we feel guilty giving away, or paperwork that might be ‘useful one day’," Rebecca says. "But clutter thrives in indecision. A helpful reframe is to ask: ‘Do I need this in my life right now?’ — if the answer is no, it’s okay to let it go — kindly and without guilt."

3. Not emptying the wardrobe first

wooden wardrobe next to potted tea and armchair

(Image credit: Oak Furnitureland)

When it comes to decluttering the wardrobe, we need to pull everything out before we begin, especially if you're trying to organise a small closet with lots of clothes. But in a bid to get the job done quickly, we're more likely to leave clothes on the rail and shuffle them along. This is the wrong approach, the pros warn.

"There's something very different about just leaving something in the place it’s always been versus first taking it out and then having to put it back in," Lesley Spellman and Ingrid Jansen, founders of The Declutter Hub, commented. "To declutter your wardrobe well, take everything out, clean the space, look at each item with a fresh pair of eyes and then, if it's a keeper, put it back."

If you struggle to keep on top of wardrobe clutter, I'd recommend trying some of IKEA's most space-savvy wardrobe solutions. They helped streamline my closet's contents and have kept everything nice and tidy since.

4. Keeping things past their expiry date

compilation image showing inside a bathroom cabinet and kitchen cupboard to show decluttering mistakes with products

(Image credit: Future | David Giles)

Whether you're decluttering the bathroom or organising the kitchen cupboards, forgetting to check products' expiry dates is an easy mistake to make — but one to avoid if you want to declutter successfully.

I know I'm guilty of holding on to toiletries that have gone past their use by, usually because it's not always clear how long they're meant to last. Check for a '6M', '12M', or '24M' mark on the bottle, which indicates how many months the product should be kept for after it's been opened.

"If you’re struggling to work out whether to let something go that you think has been hanging around a while, ask why it’s still here," Lesley and Ingrid advise. "Bathroom products, by their nature, are designed to be consumable and if it hasn’t been used in a while, is it ever going to be?"

5. Buying storage before you start

ORTHEX storage solutions in home

(Image credit: ORTHEX)

Buying storage and organising solutions is a great way to motivate yourself to declutter, which is why so many of us do it. "This is a big one when it comes to decluttering mistakes," warn Lesley and Ingrid.

"How often have you dashed to the store to buy boxes, containers or additional furniture BEFORE you’ve even got started? Most of the time, we have more than enough storage in our homes, we just have too much stuff."

A much better approach is to start the decluttering process first, or at least have a clear plan in mind so you know what storage solutions you need, if any.

I can vouch for this, having recently doubled my small kitchen's storage space with organising solutions. Before I bought anything, I started the process of decluttering first, which helped me see which storage solutions my kitchen would benefit from. It saved me both money and time.

6. Panic decluttering

clothes being organised into boxes

(Image credit: Getty Images)

If decluttering isn't something you enjoy, there's a real temptation to rush through the process as quickly as possible. "Panic decluttering", or compulsive decluttering, is the urge to impulsively get rid of items without rhyme or reason. It's a bit like the opposite of holding on to things with a "just in case" mentality, though it can be just as unhelpful.

"One of the biggest decluttering mistakes is being too quick and not taking the time to think things through," Simon Glanville, managing director, Not A Boring Box, says.

"Consider the last time you've used an item before you declutter it. If it's within the last year, then keep it. If it's over a year, then you probably don't need it, and it can be gifted to a friend or given to charity."

7. Indecisiveness

ORTHEX storage solutions in home

(Image credit: ORTHEX)

If panic decluttering isn't something you resonate with, you might be struggling with the opposite problem, which can just be as much of a hindrance. It's only too easy to spend ten minutes pondering whether or not to keep something, especially if it holds sentimental value.

If this sounds familiar, try the one-touch decluttering rule. I've put this to the test and found it forced me to make decisions more efficiently. Or, set a timer and see how much you can get through.

"Often, clutter builds up not from laziness, but from indecision," Rebecca says. "Timers help us make quicker, more instinctive choices and prevent us from getting bogged down in overthinking. Put some music on, grab a cup of tea, and get started – and most importantly, enjoy the results."

8. Delaying the *actual* decluttering part

clothes organised into boxes

(Image credit: Getty Images)

Deciding what to let go of is the hard part, but why is it that so many of us take so long to finish the job? Leaving items in a donation pile for weeks on end is one of the most common decluttering mistakes we can make, as it means we can't relish the feeling of having decluttered until the process is complete.

"This can quietly reintroduce stress, and even lead to second-guessing decisions you’ve already made," Rebecca says. "The fix? Schedule a pick-up or drop-off straight away. Make that final step part of the session, so you can enjoy the full sense of closure (and space)."


Avoiding these common decluttering mistakes will make a world of difference the next time you declutter. Why not try a method you've not tried before as well, like the 90/90 decluttering rule? The key is finding a system that works for you.

Happy decluttering.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/cleaning--decluttering/decluttering-mistakes-to-avoid/ UTW6HZ2CJv6zQJwtutHq6m Wed, 18 Jun 2025 05:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ Looking for non-toxic pans on a budget? Zyliss' Ultimate Pro collection has our approval ]]> Crafted from recycled aluminium, stainless steel, and ceramic, the Zyliss Ultimate Pro pans promise to deliver across the board for style, sustainability, and longevity. If you're interested in quality without compromise, you're in the perfect place.

Zyliss pans have celebrity status amongst our food team at woman&home. They’ve long featured in our buying guide for the best induction pans on the market and, with their ever-expanding Ultimate Pro collection, I thought it was time to take them for a spin.

I tested the frying pan as well as the sauté pan (there is also a grill in the Ultimate Pro collection) to find out whether they can still deliver on unparalleled quality and consistency in the heat of the test kitchen. Here’s how it went.

Specifications

Zyliss Ultimate Pro Pan

(Image credit: Future)

RRP

£40-60

Sizes available

Fry pan, sauté pan, grill pan

Non-stick

Yes

Composition

Recycled aluminium body with stainless steel base

Dishwasher safe?

Yes

Hob compatability

All

Oven safe?

Yes, up to 220°C

Unboxing

Zyliss Ultimate Pro Pan

(Image credit: Future)

Zyliss keeps packaging for the Ultimate Pro collection really simple. All the pans come with a cardboard wrap around them, detailing the components, cleaning advice, and any other important information that it would help to know. Once you’ve read through it, you can pop the cardboard in the recycling, guilt-free.

I’d recommend giving the pans a good clean, so that no dust or dirt that may have settled in transit gets baked into your cheffing creations. Aside from that, you can start cooking straight away.

Who would it suit?

Zyliss Ultimate Pro Pan

(Image credit: Future)

The Zyliss Ultimate Pro pans are second to none. Given their reasonable price tag and classic design, they have a pretty broad appeal, but there are some specifics that really deserve a shout-out.

First, the non-stick is ceramic, which has benefits in lots of ways. It means you can use metal utensils when you cook without needing to worry about scratching off any non-stick (a godsend for me) and I have always found that ceramic is really naturally robust too. The second benefit of a ceramic non-stick is that it is often called ‘non-toxic’. Unlike other materials used, if this is damaged or scratched, you don’t have the same concerns as has been raised for materials such as Teflon. So, that gives these pans a big tick for health-conscious chefs as well as ones who want non-stick that can withstand their stainless steel.

The non-stick element is also great. I didn’t burn anything — even though I tried hard — and found that I didn’t need to use oil to keep food moving around the pans. In some cases, I threw oil in to get the food crispy, but that’s only for a texture and flavour benefit, rather than for any practical motive.

Another feature that you might not spot, but should definitely note, is that the Zyliss pans are really nice to handle, especially if you struggle with weight through your wrists. Given their quality, I expected them to be heavy and straining, but they're a manageable weight. The sauté pan has the potential to get heavy, but the handle on the opposite side (which doesn't get hot) makes this really easy to carry around.

What is it like to use?

Zyliss Ultimate Pro Pan

(Image credit: Future)

I took both pans through a pretty similar series of test, because I have a set selection that lets me compare different brands’ pans to each other. This started with really basic frying and moved through to slower dimmers on the hob. My overall impression of these pans is that they’re really easy to use, very responsive to changes in heat, and great for when you need really quick, but still even results. I've already mentioned how nicely the handles distribute weight, making them easier to hold, but I want to emphasise it again here. Alongside pouring pouts on the edge of each pan and drainage holes in the sauté pan, the Zyliss Ultimate Pro set has clearly been designed by people who think a lot about what these pans are like to cook with.

The first test that both the pans went through was sitting on the hob on full heat. After twenty seconds, I flick water onto the base of the pan to check the temperature. On my very first test, both pans were already sizzling hot. The water beads danced across the pan instantly: proof that they’re very quick to get hot.

Zyliss Ultimate Pro Pan

(Image credit: Future)

With this in mind, I moved on to frying onions. These need heat quickly and evenly. I used a drizzle of olive oil to ensure that each curl of onion crisped up in all the right places. Within four minutes, the onions were lovely and golden at the tips, but with tenderness in the middle. I ran a test where I sat the onions still, hoping they would burn on the high heat, but try as I might, I couldn’t get them to stick onto the pan. They really mean non-stick when they promise it.

Zyliss Ultimate Pro Pan

(Image credit: Future)

The next test was making pancakes, a test which I left for the frying pan only. Of all the pans I used that day — fifteen — this made the best pancake. I added a little butter to the base so that I could get some nice golden crunchiness on the edge of the pancake and watched it cook through perfectly. You can see that the colour across the whole pancake is a beautiful, even hue, yet more proof that the heat across the base of this pan is really consistent.

I wanted to check that these could do low and slow cooking too, so I melted chocolate into a sauce. You can see in the image that I got a really glossy mix. The chocolate didn't cease. Instead, it melted really smoothly and nicely. I loved it.

Zyliss Ultimate Pro Pan

(Image credit: Future)

The next test was for the sauté pan: taking 1 litre of water to the boil. Thanks to the clear lid, the pan was all quick for its size (it took just over two minutes to boil the water) and I could watch the bubbles inside the pan without lifting the lid and letting all the steam out.

After the water, I made soup, boiled potatoes, cooked fruit, and made my way through a week’s worth of meal preparation really effortlessly. Even when full of potatoes, the pan was still comfortable to hold, the handles didn’t get too hot and they were a nice size relative to how heavy the pan would be when full.

Zyliss Ultimate Pro Pan

(Image credit: Future)

I actually used a stick blender with my soup, which I wouldn’t always do straight into a pan, but these non-sticks are tough, so I wanted to test them out. True to their promise, I didn’t scratch or damage the pans at all. In fact, once I washed them up, they were as good as new.

The soup recipe also made great use of the different sized draining holes in the lid of the pan, as well as the pouring spout. These are all little touches, but they make a big difference to the overall experience of using the pan.

Cleaning

Salter Megastone Frying Pan Set being washed up

(Image credit: Future)

The cherry on top of this whole experience is that the pans can go in the dishwasher. I washed them up by hand — it’s just so easy thanks to the non stick. Even the glass lid of the sauté pan wipes clean really easily. Luckily, the pans stack neatly away too. It’s nice not to have to sweat about the less glamorous parts of the cooking process.

How does it compare?

Salter Megastone Frying Pan Set on the hob

(Image credit: Future)

Zyliss’ pans are brilliant. I tested them alongside some other seriously impressive pans and the ones that stand out for a direct comparison is Salter’s Megastone Set. These have a robust non-stick that can also stand stainless steel utensils. They have a more textured finish, which might suit your kitchen better and they’re also a lot cheaper, so great if you’re shopping on a budget. The downside is that they aren’t dishwasher safe, so you have to wash them gently and by hand.

Should you buy it?

Zyliss Ultimate Pro Pan

(Image credit: Future)

If you want to buy individual, top-quality pans, the Zyliss Ultimate Pro set are brilliant. They're well-priced and fall comfortably into the non-toxic category of cookware, which provides some nice relief for many cautious chefs. I loved having these in my kitchen and can't wait to see what comes next from Zyliss.

How we test

Zyliss Ultimate Pro Pan

(Image credit: Future)

At woman&home how we test induction pans is a serious, rigorous process. Every review that you read follows a standardised set of tests, designed to tell us about the speed, versatility, quality, and usability of a pan. We make notes on everything from what it feels like to hold and what it's like to clean right through to how quickly it can boil water and what a pancake cooked in one of these looks like.

I like to think that this review gives you a holistic idea of what these pans are like to use, as well as who they suit, and whether they're good value for money. However, if you still have questions, don't hesitate to email me with your questions. If you want to look closer at the process, we also have a page dedicated to how we test induction pans too.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/kitchen/zyliss-ultimate-pro-pan-review/ QvNdEAkyAp6a2NyUCjRheB Mon, 16 Jun 2025 05:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ Don't buy expensive linen sheets - Dunelm's affordable range feels identical and it's on sale right now ]]>

Starting at £72, this is one of the best deals you're ever going to get on linen bedding. And if that sounds too steep for you, Dunelm's Cotton Linen Bedding feels almost like this (just a little crisper) and it's only £40 in the sale.View Deal

In my opinion, the best sheets you can sleep on are made from linen. They’ve got that lived-in, effortless feel that somehow manages to be both breathable and comforting, just like your favourite summer dress that you can't wait to get back into every year. Plus, they don’t need ironing (thank goodness), and they get softer the more you use them.

The only snag is that linen bedding can be eye-wateringly expensive. And while I’d love to kit out my whole home in the best bedding money can buy, my bank balance usually has other ideas. So, imagine my delight when I came across Dunelm’s Edited Life Linen Collection. With prices starting at just £50, it’s a seriously purse-friendly way to enjoy the linen look and feel without blowing the budget.

Even better, Dunelm’s bedding recycling scheme means you can refresh your bedroom without the guilt. Just drop off your old bed linen in store and it’ll be given a new lease of life. It’s an easy win if you’re trying to make more conscious home choices without giving up on comfort or style.

What really impressed me, though, is how Dunelm's Edited Life Linen Bedding holds up during warm nights. If you're wondering how to keep a bed cool in summer, this lightweight cotton-linen blend is a bit of a miracle. It’s soft, airy, and doesn’t cling, which is ideal for anyone who, like me, finds themselves overheating at 3 am and flinging off the duvet in a sleepy panic. Dunelm might not be the first name that springs to mind for luxe bedding, but trust me, it’s quietly brilliant.

Dunelm Edited LIfe Linen Bedding Specifications

Dunelm Linen Bedding on the bed

(Image credit: Future)

RRP

£72-140

Sizes available

Single - Super Kingsize

Colour options

White, light blue, dark blue, brown, orange, dark green, yellow

Composition

100% linen

Fastening type

Button

Care instructions

machine washable, iron on a medium setting, tumble dry on a low heat

Composition of the Dunelm Edited Life Linen Bedding

Texture of the Dunelm Linen Bedding

(Image credit: Future)

What I love most about this bedding (aside from how dreamy it looks) is the feel of it. It’s made from a lovely blend of high-quality European linen, which gives it that soft, slightly crumpled look that’s effortlessly chic (and means you can skip the iron).

It’s pre-washed too, so it arrives feeling buttery soft rather than stiff or scratchy. And because linen is naturally breathable and temperature regulating, it’s a great all-year-rounder, keeping you cool on hot, sticky nights and cosy when the chill sets in. Dunelm's Edited Life Linen Bedding gets bonus points for being OEKO-TEX® certified as well, so you can rest easy knowing it’s been made with high environmental and ethical standards.

The OEKO-TEX® MADE IN GREEN label might not be the snazziest name, but it means this bedding has been made in factories that meet strict environmental, social, and chemical safety standards. It’s like a gold star for sustainability.

Plus, every part of the supply chain is traceable, which is a big deal if you're trying to shop more mindfully. It’s nice to know that something you spend so much time snuggled up in has been produced with a bit of care and consideration, both for people and the planet.

Who would the Dunelm Edited Life Linen Bedding suit?

The bottom of the Dunelm Linen Bedding

(Image credit: Future)

Linen is packed with natural benefits, which makes it such a clever choice for bedding. As a natural fibre, it’s brilliant at wicking away moisture, so you’re less likely to wake up feeling hot and clammy. It also allows your skin to breathe and helps regulate your temperature through the night, making it a dream for hot sleepers or anyone who tends to overheat.

I’ve already let the cat out of the bag when it comes to what makes these sheets special: the price. If you’ve been on the hunt for lightweight, breathable bedding that doesn’t cost the earth, Dunelm’s Edited Life Linen is a bit of a hidden gem. It gives you that relaxed, luxurious feel without the usual price tag.

Style-wise, it’s just as appealing. Dunelm’s muted, earthy tones are timeless and easy to mix into any bedroom scheme. I love that you can leave linen looking a little rumpled and it still feels effortlessly chic. There's no need to fuss over perfectly smoothed corners or crease-free duvet covers. It’s low-maintenance and lovely.

What is the Dunelm Edited Life Linen Bedding like to sleep on?

Slub of the Dunelm Linen Bedding

(Image credit: Future)

The Dunelm Edited Life Linen Sheets are a great fit. Dunelm doesn't sell a pure linen base sheet, so I used my Soak & Sleep base sheet. It's one of the best value for money options out there, so makes a perfect match for Dunelm. The pillows and duvet were a great, easy fit so there wasn’t any need to sweat over the sheets.

My hand on the Dunelm Linen Bedding

(Image credit: Future)

I was really pleased with the colour and feel of the linen, as I was worried that it might be a little thin to keep costs down. However, the Dunelm sheets were great. My duvet fitted inside the generous duvet cover, and all the buttons kept everything neatly tucked up inside. Given the quality of the linen, I felt the buttons were a little cheap, but you could easily hide these away or have them changed.

The fold lines that you can see in the picture above shook right out, and I could feel the buttery softness of the linen straight away. Dunelm pre-washes the sheets so that the linen isn't as crisp as it would be fresh and I am reliably informed that these sheets only get softer.

Dunelm Linen Bedding set on the bed

(Image credit: Future)

The real test comes in the sleeping. Whilst these aren’t the coolest linen sheets I’ve tested, they’re still a lot cooler than alternatives. If you’re transitioning from cotton to linen, this is a great step in the middle. It feels a little like cotton still — there’s definitely some rigidity — but I would say that it is most similar to linen in both look and feel.

I’ve found it really comfortable to sleep in, the sheets have felt soft against my skin, and they’ve worked well. I even got fake tan on them, and it washed right out, to my relief.

On the cooling front, my skin has felt fresh in the mornings and I haven’t been overly hot, but I still have felt warm at night. In other words, these aren’t the sheets that will stop your night sweats, but they'll do a lot of work towards helping.

How to clean the Dunelm Edited Life Linen Bedding

Dunelm Linen Bedding in its packaging

(Image credit: Future)

Keeping these clean is really simple. Dunelm pre-washes them so you don't need to worry too much about colour running. They're machine washable, safe to iron on a medium heat and to tumble dry on a low setting.

I'd recommend keeping things as cool as possible, because you want to be gentle on these sheets. It'll go a long way towards keeping linen looking and feeling good.

Now, I've only been sleeping on these for a couple of weeks, so I turned to other reviewers for a long-term look at what these are like to clear. One reviewer said, "I have had these sheets for three years and the colour is still good. We now have them for every room in the house." And they're not alone. The website boasts many five-star reviews with long-term sleepers raving about how these sheets only get softer.

How does the Dunelm Edited Life Linen Bedding compare?

Button on the Dunelm Linen Bedding

(Image credit: Future)

I love Dunelm's linen bedding for an earthy, simple, breathable set to sleep in. One of the USPs of the Edited Life is the low price point for linen, so I wanted to find something similar to compare these to for you. In my mind, you have two options.

The first is going for Dunelm's Cotton Linen blend, which is half the price again and pretty convincing as pure linen. It's a little smarter and stiffer, but still cool and nice to sleep in. Your second option is Soak & Sleep's French Linen is probably the best contender for the same place in my heart as Dunelm's sheets.

They're a great price too (just a touch more expensive than Dunelm), they feel almost impossibly soft, and they are lovely to sleep in. I especially love the tie fastenings at the bottom of the duvet, which make for a more elegant finish than Dunelm's buttons. The bonus of Soak & Sleep's bedding is that it comes with a base sheet, and you have some more colour options. So, if you've got some room in the budget, they're worth looking at.

That being said, if you like Dunelm's colour options, you can't go wrong with these. I'd struggle to find you something cheaper, and I don't think you'd feel any difference without doubling your budget and taking a look at the Piglet In Bed sheets, for example.

Should you buy the Dunelm Edited Life Linen Bedding?

Texture of the Dunelm Linen Bedding duvet

(Image credit: Future)

If you want to enjoy the luxuriously breathable feel of linen, these sheets are perfect. Whilst your colour options are a little limited, if you find you like one of the earthy tones, you'll get to enjoy the breathable, gentle benefits of European linen without breaking the bank.

How we test

At woman&home, we take our bedding seriously, because a good night’s sleep can make all the difference. Each set we review is tested in real homes over several nights, paying close attention to comfort, breathability, softness, and how well it regulates temperature.

We also look at how easy it is to care for (because no one wants high-maintenance sheets), and whether it holds up after washing. Our testers consider design, fit, and value for money too, so you can feel confident you’re investing in bedding that’s as practical as it is beautiful.

If you want to find out more, you can visit our dedicated page for how we test bedding.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/dunelm-edited-life-linen-bedding-review/ fqNu7gkMogZWusHvB3CZSZ Sun, 15 Jun 2025 14:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ How to clean a wooden chopping board to ensure a bacteria-free surface ]]> Chopping boards are among the most-used items in our kitchens. It's therefore no surprise to learn that such frequent use makes wooden chopping boards significant culprits for harbouring nasty bacteria when not cleaned sufficently.

Failing to clean this wooden kitchen essential properly, both during your daily cleaning habits and for a thorough deep clean, is something professional chefs warn us about – but one that's easily avoided.

Similar to cleaning wooden spoons, a gentle approach is best, as the experts explain below in our guide on how to clean a wooden board without causing damage.

How to clean a wooden chopping board: expert tips

No one wants to spend hours on end cleaning their kitchen; therefore, knowing how to clean your kitchen quickly yet thoroughly can be extremely useful. However, there are some areas in your kitchen that may need a little extra care and attention, one of these being your wooden chopping board.

"Start by brushing off any crumbs or food bits, using a spatula or just your hand. Then sprinkle a generous pinch of coarse salt across the board to act as a mild abrasive," instructs cleaning expert at Smol, Catherine Green.

Then, grab half a lemon and scrub the surface using the cut side of the fruit. Not only will the combination lift grime and remove stains, it will also help deodorise your chopping board.

Kitchen with light wooden worktops with a stack of wooden chopping boards and a bowl of lemons

(Image credit: Future | Polly Eltes)

After giving the board a good scrub all over and letting the juices settle in, Catherine recommends rinsing it with warm water, wiping dry with a cloth and then allowing it to stand upright until it's completely air dry.

This is the best expert cleaning hack to get that thorough deep clean of your wooden chopping board. However, the experts do recommend a more time-sensitive method after each use. A simple yet thorough wash with dish soap and warm water will do the trick just fine.

Just make sure you're not soaking the board, as the porous nature of the wood can lead to it splitting or warping. A consideration you'll be familiar with if you often clean hardwood floors

However, you'll need to go the lemon and salt route once every couple of weeks, depending on how often you use your chopping board and the amount of stains and smells it has.

How to keep a wooden chopping board bacteria-free

As a hotspot for bacteria, chopping boards can not only be a safety issue, but they can also thwart any attempt to make your kitchen smell good. Luckily, there are simple ways to prevent bacteria.

"Clean it straight after each," says Catherine. "Use warm water and washing up liquid is fine. Then once in a while, spray on white vinegar or a 1:1 mix of water and hydrogen peroxide, let it sit for a few minutes, and rinse it off."

She then points out that the main thing is to ensure it's thoroughly dry before you put it away after each clean.

"Treating it with a food-grade mineral oil every once in a while will also prevent moisture absorption (which makes life harder for bacteria)," adds Catherine.

picture of wooden chopping board with knife rested on top

(Image credit: Getty Images)

FAQs

How do chefs clean their chopping boards?

If you're looking for some essential kitchen cleaning tips from professional chefs, then you're in luck. "Chefs keep it quick and no-nonsense," explains Catherine.

"A rinse under hot water, a squirt of washing-up liquid, a scrub, and then a thorough dry. Some go the extra step and wipe it down with white vinegar or a mild hydrogen peroxide solution, especially if it’s been used for raw meat."

She points out that the biggest rule is never to let the board stay damp. Professional cooks also ensure they are using separate boards for meat and veg, to avoid any nasty cross-contamination.

picture of raw chicken on wooden chopping board

(Image credit: Getty Images)

What is a natural disinfectant for a wood chopping board?

When it comes to think we prepare food, it's a good idea to use as few chemicals as possible and stick to natural alternatives. Even when cleaning your kitchen cabinets, many experts would recommend the natural route.

"White vinegar works a treat. It’s antibacterial, biodegradable and probably already in your kitchen. You can also mix it with a bit of lemon juice or bicarbonate of soda if you want to boost the cleaning power, but vinegar on its own does the job nicely," advises Catherine.

Kathryn Farrell, Cooking Buyer at Lakeland, also recommends using a food-safe mineral oil or beeswax on the board with a clean cloth. Doing this will battle against bacteria while you're using the board and help to keep it out of the small crevices in the wood.

Does white vinegar clean chopping boards?

picture of white vinegar in spray bottle

(Image credit: Getty Images)

It's no secret that cleaning with vinegar is the answer to many a household chore. There are so many advantageous properties to vinegar when it comes to cleaning, and your chopping board can benefit massively from it.

"Yep, white vinegar cuts through grease, gets rid of smells and kills most bacteria. Apply it to your chopping board, wait a few minutes, wipe, rinse and dry. No need for anything stronger!" says Catherine.

Shop chopping board cleaning essentials


Now you know how to clean this kitchen essential, you can rest assured that you and your household are safe from nasty bacteria every time you cook.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/how-to-clean-a-wooden-chopping-board-expert-advice/ P2ffC2uYUafQVyEy8qu2QC Sun, 15 Jun 2025 10:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ I asked Jamie Oliver for his go-to summer lunch - get ready to eat this unexpected, easy meal on repeat ]]> If you've found yourself Googling 'simple summer meal ideas' or scrolling the internet for healthy, easy ways to host outside, I'm with you. Summer is a beautiful time of year to eat, but it's also tricky. I’ve already faced the dinner dilemma more times than I’d like to admit. So when I had the chance to ask Jamie Oliver for some fresh inspiration, you can bet I had my notebook ready.

Ever the king of fuss-free cooking, Jamie Oliver is always finding clever ways to make good food even easier. He's taught me a trick which doubles the space in your air fryer and even recently launched a pizza oven that's perfect for beginners. Now, he’s sharing his secrets for effortless summer eating and hosting.

I spent the morning at Jamie’s new cookery school, fully decked out with cutting-edge Samsung AI appliances. In that time, I cooked one of his go-to summer dishes — twice. When he introduced the recipe, he called it “a bit audacious.” Then he grinned and added, “It’s a bit mad, but it’s easy, it’s quick, and it’s blimmin’ delicious too. If I’m having friends over or just want to throw together something from the fridge, this is what I make.” Ready to host like Jamie Oliver? Of course you are.

Jamie Oliver's Summer Hosting Tips

So, what's the genius idea? Jamie Oliver has taken the traditional Yorkshire pudding, infused it with summer flavours, and changed the way we serve it. He places a large dish of Yorkshire pudding on a platter, treating it like a tear and share loaf that doubles up as a wrap. Then, he packs colourful summer vegetables and fish inside. "It's great for sharing. People can use their hands, tear pieces off, fill it up, and eat as much as they want. You don't have to spend time fiddling away with portioning food up, you can sit back and chill, I love it."

Now, if you're anything like me, you might be a little apprehensive about a Yorkshire pudding platter, but the way that Jamie cooks all the components makes the big difference. He's got a trick to make your Yorkshire puddings taste cheffy, a healthy way to cook colourful vegetables, and a cheap trick for making - in his words "frumpy courgettes look really elegant." I managed to get my five a day on my plate with lots of colours too. I've made it at least twice a week since and now I'm ready to share the secret.

Make a platter

The whole premise of Jamie Oliver's special summer lunch works off the idea of sharing boards and platters. I've been a long time lover of the smorgasbord style dining and Jamie says “it’s a genius, easy way to host. You can prep on it, you can cook on it, you can serve on it. You can be a bit dramatic and also you get to share the food, everyone helps themselves, you can sit back, chill out, and enjoy the vibes.”

Jamie actually has his own mango wood chopping board that doubles up as a serving board which I used for my brunch prep and I have to say that it’s really truly lovely. The thick, warm wood makes a great base for pizzas, roast dinners, mezze-style serving and breakfast spreads,

If you’re thinking that this could be your ticket to an easy summer of hosting and dining, of course, Jamie’s cookbooks are full of good ideas, but I also love this book, called Platters and Boards, which is dedicated to platter ideas.

Jamie's mango wood chopping board brings rustic charm and texture to any meal. You can see it has bread on here, but I think it makes the perfect platter for just about any and every meal.View Deal

Fill the platter with colourful vegetables

One of Jamie's many passion projects is getting us all eating more vegetables. As he was explaining the meal, Jamie couldn't resist explaining why the vegetables were a non-negotiable. "“As a nation, we’re eating less vegetables than ever," he says, "and when people say that vegetables are boring it’s because they’re not giving them the love and the respect and the care,” he’s smiling and tossing a bowl of colourful vegetables while he says this and it's the most compelling argument I've ever heard for asparagus, second to the flavours that came out from how Jamie prepared them.

When we got to prepping, Jamie explained that to whip up this dish "you just need good pans and decent knives as well as one of the cheapest gadgets." At this point, he holds a peeler in the air. "Cheap, cheap, cheap," he says, "amazing. Even my friends that can't use a knife could use this. With a peeler you can get sushi chef quality slithers. A chef couldn't do that. That's the beauty of a peeler. We can use something cheap to create something beautiful and elegant out of something frumpy."

The humble peeler does a lot of hard work in Jamie's kitchen. This is the one that we had in the cookery school and it's a place where Jamie promises you don't need to spend a lot of money.View Deal

The peeler isn't where Jamie's magic stops. It's actually only the beginning. He explains "we can make delicious meals out of things that you have in your fridge, but how? I have this method that I love. I worked in Japan for a few years and they were very very good at dry grilling. As a chef, you are trained to take vegetables, put olive oil on them and then grill them. I don’t agree with that. In Japan, what they would do (and I love their logic, I love their intelligence for food), they would dry grill vegetables and it actually gives you a very different flavour.”

Essentially, this meant taking peppers, asparagus, and courgette. and sitting it in a pan (we used Jamie Oliver's very own collection, which has been made in collaboration with Tefal) without any oil. Keep the hob on a medium heat and you'll see them charr. The end result will be some beautifully sweet, soft, smoky vegetables. That's not the end of it yet.

Jamie Oliver's trick for dressing vegetables

After dry grilling, the vegetables had lost some moisture, which is where Jamie brought in the big guns. Dressing. This is actually a really simple component: it's olive oil, herbs, and a vinegar or citrus fruit.

Jamie started off by confessing his love for herbs. "Herbs changed my life," he says, "if I didn't have herbs in the world, I wouldn't cook. And they're so cheap to grow and so easy to grow, even in the UK which is famous for being a bit rainy and miserable,"

He chopped up parsley to mix in with the olive oil. Jamie paraded around the kitchen with a bottle of this like a trophy. "We love olive oil, he proclaimed, "it's got It’s got antioxidants, polyphenols, it’s my number one oil of choice. It’s a delicious flavour. There’s science behind the Mediterranean diet."

"We’ll take some lovely olive oil. Three parts oil to one part acid — we can play with that we can choose lemon, lime, orange, a blend, white wine vinegar grapefruit juice, a seasoning of salt and pepper. I know it’s really basic. If I’m doing a barbecue and I’ve got friends coming round, I might do a lemon and olive oil dressing with mint and asparagus then with courgette, I’ll change the herb and change the acid and then you’re amplifying all the natural differences of the vegetables."

I tossed the vegetables in this dressing and the sweet caramelisation that I had from the dry grilling married up with the tangy, earthy, fresh notes of the dressing beautifully. This is the part of the recipe that I've been cooking on repeat.

Jamie Oliver's Yorkshire Pudding

Now, I promised you some Yorkshire pudding and so that's what you'll get. Jamie Oliver's Yorkshire pudding recipe was actually created with some of the country's top chemists because he wanted to get the perfect rise, crisp, and airiness, so there's science and passion behind them.

He took a large enamel tray and drizzled sunflower oil in it. "Lots of people worry about this amount of oil and they think it's unhealthy, but I've done loads of tests and your Yorkshire puddings don't actually absorb that much oil, it's just a non-stick and a crisping agent. That doesn't mean we can't have fun with it though."

Jamie recommends infusing the oil with rosemary to give it some flavour, which is a very simple stroke of genius. The Yorkshire pudding came out of the oven looking beautiful. Jamie arranged it on the board, completing the platter and then he tore off a section and used it like a wrap, filling it with the dressed vegetables. When I did the same later on, and the day after, and at the weekend, and the week after, the joy of it didn't wear off. This is my go-to summer brunch recipe.


It really is that simple. Jamie's platter idea is quick to work through and prepare ahead and then, as he points out, you can sit back and relax when the guests arrive. Most importantly, it's an easy way to enjoy vegetables in the summer.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/kitchen/jamie-oliver-brunch-idea/ qnnRxDGYED5T9yMtr7ufd5 Sun, 15 Jun 2025 05:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ Japanese garden ideas – 10 ways to create a soothing space, with advice from the experts ]]> Japanese garden ideas shouldn't be overlooked when planning an outdoor space. Instead of billowing borders and brightly coloured annuals, this type of design offers a simpler, more soothing feel. They tend to maintain their appeal throughout the seasons, too, and the style can be applied to small, urban gardens as well as larger plots.

Calm, considered, and deeply connected with the natural world, a Japanese-inspired approach to landscaping could easily become the next big garden trend. Visitors of this year’s RHS Chelsea Flower Show will have witnessed the wonders of Kazuyuki Ishihara's "Cha No Niwa – Japanese Tea Garden", and undoubtedly, its beauty will have influenced many to try a similar scheme at home.

To help you recreate this gorgeous look, I turned to gardening experts for advice. Below, they share plenty of ideas on the types of elements to include, from planting choices to cloud pruning.

10 Japanese garden ideas to introduce to your space

Similar to sensory gardens, Japanese gardens are ideal places to relax and reflect. With the right know-how, you can create your own outdoor sanctuary.

1. Focus on foliage

bridge and trees in Japanese garden in Portland

Shrubs and trees create a palette of green in this Japanese garden in Portland (Image credit: Panoramic Images / Alamy Stock Photo)

“Resist the urge to choose lots of different plants. Be disciplined,” says Nick Turrell, a horticultural advisor with the RHS. Plants in Japanese gardens are all about shape, grace and form, he adds.

You may be familiar with white gardens, which prioritise plants with white blooms. Well, according to Nick, Japanese gardens are green gardens. So, focus on plants that have attractive foliage, and layer them to create a soothing tapestry of verdant shades and interesting textures.

Hostas are a well-suited option, and are some of the best plants for shade, too. Nick recommends opting for the large-leaved varieties like “Sum and Substance” or Hosta sieboldiana var. elegans. “They’re architectural, and the thicker leaves are less palatable to slugs.” You could also opt for hardy ferns. “Dryopteris filix-mas has grace,” Nick says, highlighting how it’s good in shade, even dry shade, and is easy to grow. Polygonatum biflorum (Smooth solomon's-seal) looks good with the ferns, he adds.

“Evergreens are important to provide structure,” Nick continues, and recommends the dwarf pine, Pinus mugo “Mops”. “Broadleaf evergreens are also good, especially the dark glossy leaves of camellias. Keep them clipped to keep them small and neat." Once camellias have finished flowering, he recommends pruning them immediately.

Another evergreen contender to consider is the compact Pieris japonica (Crocus have a range). Joe Cowley, a gardener for the Japanese Gateway Garden at Kew, highlights its delicate urn-shaped flowers in spring and brightly coloured new growth.

“There is a variety of cultivars that offer differing flower colours and foliage vividness. Pieris tends to have a reasonably bushy habit, but older plants can often be thinned out to display their naturally bonsai-esque structure. I find the Japanese gardening philosophy of aiding a plant in displaying its inherent beauty via considered pruning to be easily practised with Pieris japonica, it’s done all the work already”

2. Dot flowers throughout the landscape


flowering Primula sieboldii 'Jessica'

Primula sieboldii "Jessica" (Image credit: John Richmond / Alamy Stock Photo)

Flowers tend to take a back seat in Japanese gardens, unlike in cottage garden schemes. But you don’t need to eradicate them – a few select species can add welcome dashes of colour against all the calming green.

Joe suggests planting Primula sieboldii. “There’s a real charm about how primulas’ single stems stand simultaneously tall and daintily small in the cacophony of everyday life. They are effective in a Japanese garden if they are planted naturally and not in the characteristic rigid symmetry of Western-style bedding. Plant sparsely with more of a lack of structure, and the few individual flowers will stand out perfectly as small points of focus.

“There's a dizzying array of cultivar options out there for these flowers, ranging from delicate thin-petaled options like ‘Aoba-no-fue’ to the cloudlike ‘Koodori, ” Joe adds. “They also work well on proud display as a singular plant in a pot.”

Elegant blue irises can also work well alongside other Japanese garden ideas, as demonstrated in the aforementioned "Cha No Niwa – Japanese Tea Garden". You could also opt for azaleas, which have springtime blooms in dazzling shades. "Fumiko", available at Crocus from autumn, is a semi-evergreen variety with striking purple flowers.

3. Shape plants with careful pruning


Niwaki-style Pinus sylvestris 'Glauca' tree in Japanese garden

A Niwaki-style Pinus sylvestris 'Glauca' (Image credit: Klaus Steinkamp / Alamy Stock Photo)

Evergreen shrubs and trees meticulously pruned into sculptural, cloud-like shapes are a classic addition to Japanese gardens. The method used is known as “Niwaki” or “cloud pruning”. Bonsai trees are often similar in appearance, but these are smaller and grown in pots rather than on the ground.

“If time is of no issue and a long-term project is something that takes your fancy, then a bonsai or Niwaki-style pine is perfect,” says Joe. “Typically in Japan, this is done with red or white pines native to the region, but why not try it with a UK native instead?

“Scots pine (Pinus sylvestris) is more tolerant of needle blight, which affects red and white pines,” Joe continues. However, he does note that it can reach heights of 25m if left untouched, “so only plant out if the regular maintenance for size control will take place”.

“The good thing about bonsai is you can decide a height that suits your need, both to add some structure to the garden and to keep the maintenance manageable. There’s lots of information out there in books and online about the process of bonsai and Niwaki.”

If you want to try cloud pruning on a small-leaved evergreen shrub instead of a tree, Nick recommends Lonicera nitida (shrubby honeysuckle), which “is clothed right down to the ground with leaves”. Whatever plant you try it with, ensure your garden shears are sharp to get the best results. These Niwaki garden shears from Crocus, made in Japan, are perfect for the job.

4. Enhance the sensory appeal by adding water


Kazuyuki Ishihara show garden 2012 ' Satoyama Life'

A water feature in the "Satoyama Life" garden, designed by Kazuyuki Ishihara (Image credit: A Garden / Alamy Stock Photo)

James Bentley, director at British garden furniture supplier Charles Bentley, says that water plays a central role in Japanese garden design, as it symbolises calmness and the passage of time. “Whether it’s a koi pond or a small stream, it’s there to soothe the senses and create a peaceful atmosphere.” Similarly, Joe recommends any possible inclusion of water, even if this is a small prefab pond. “It can support a huge range of animal species whilst fostering a sense of balance and stillness.”

If you want to avoid digging up the ground, consider opting for a water feature instead. James recommends choosing a minimalist stone-effect fountain for a more traditional look, or a contemporary, tiered bowl design to suit modern outdoor spaces.

“The key is to consider not just the look of your water feature, but the sound it produces, too. Whether it’s a soft, meditative trickle, the gentle babble of a stream, or the more energising rush of a cascading waterfall, each creates a different mood and can completely transform the ambience of your garden. Position your water feature among pebbles, bamboo or low planting to blend it into the landscape, and enjoy your own serene retreat just steps from your door.”

5. Embrace a dry garden


gravel garden area at Cha no Niwa - Japanese Tea Garden designed by Kazuyuki Ishihara

A gravel garden area in "Cha no Niwa – Japanese Tea Garden" designed by Kazuyuki Ishihara (Image credit: Ellen Rooney / Alamy Stock Photo)

If adding a water feature to your garden isn’t possible, you could consider a “dry garden”, also known as Karesansui. “Instead of water trickling down a watercourse, use small pebbles to create the illusion of the movement of water,” says Nick. “Soften the look with ferns and hostas.”

They don’t have to be overly large or ostentatious, says Joe. “A small two-metre-squared base of white gravel with a medium-sized rock in the centre is perfect.

“The gravel can also be raked into patterns," Joe adds, noting how an enjoyable rabbit hole to go down is learning about how and why these patterns are made. It does, however, require regular maintenance, as Nick points out – “pets and children are no respecters of raked gravel.”

Top tip: Nick advises against using pea shingle from a garden centre to create a dry garden. “Look carefully and you’ll see five or six different colours of stone, which is too busy. Choose stone from a quarry, it will be a consistent colour, and therefore calmer."

6. Divide spaces with Japanese-style fencing


hydrangeas and bamboo fence

Bamboo fencing adds structure to this line of blue hydrangeas (Image credit: oasis2me / iStock / Getty Images Plus / Getty Images)

Fence ideas are a key way to define boundaries, block your neighbours' view, and break a space up into zones. Joe suggests using Take gaki, a traditional, Japanese style of fence constructed from bamboo (and often, black twine).

"They are a way of developing a sense of transition through a garden, and the ageing and weathering of the bamboo can be an example of wabi-sabi – perfect imperfections that mirror life’s transience," he says. "I would recommend doing a bit of research on the Yotsume gaki style and having some fun with the crafting."

You could alternatively plant bamboo in your garden to create a botanical screen. "Just make sure you use the right bamboo variety, as some of them can quickly grow out of control and become a nuisance if not planted correctly," says Chris Bonnett, founder of GardeningExpress.

"Clumping" types, rather than "running", tend to be easier to keep under control. "Red Dragon" available from GardeningExpress is a good non-invasive option, with red stems that mature to green.

7. Plant trees that change with the seasons


Japanese style garden with koi pond and acers

This garden includes plenty of small and colourful acers (Image credit: Audrey Walker Images / Alamy Stock Photo)

Japanese maples, or acers, are a quintessential tree for this style. Amber Hind, a gardener at the Fanhams Hall hotel (which has a Japanese garden within its grounds), highlights their wide variety of shapes, their vibrant seasonal colours, and how they symbolise the ever-changing landscape.

"These trees are also low maintenance, requiring only light pruning in early spring. At Fanhams Hall, we feature 15 Acers, each adding a unique splash of colour and form to our garden paths."

In a small garden, Nick recommends using Acer palmatum "Dissectum" types. "They only grow one to two metres tall and will create the shape of an open umbrella or igloo." And if you're working with a patio or courtyard, you don't have to miss out – some varieties of Japanese maple trees can be grown in pots.

Another seasonal beauty well-suited to Japanese garden ideas is the Yoshino cherry blossom tree, as recommended by Amber. "Known for its breathtaking pink and white blossoms, this fast-growing tree can reach 10 to 15 feet within the first few years," she says. "Blooming from March to May, it brings a sense of renewal and elegance to any garden. We’re proud to have 18 Yoshino cherry trees gracing the grounds at Fanhams Hall."

8. Create meandering paths

path in Japanese garden at Kingston Lacy in Dorset, England

A stone pathway in the Japanese garden at Kingston Lacy in Dorset (Image credit: Jim Monk / Alamy Stock Photo)

"Paths are important," says Nick. "A Japanese garden is about inviting you on a journey, so the path or stepping stones should be designed to make the most of the space and encourage you to take a stroll. Create focal points on the way, something to look at and enjoy. A stone bench maybe, or a large boulder to sit and rest by some water."

If you have a pond (and the space), consider adding a simple wooden bridge, which Chris says is a classic feature in Japanese gardens. "It creates a beautiful focal point and offers a peaceful spot to pause and take in the view."

Bridges don’t have to be elaborate, he adds, noting that even a few stepping stones can create a striking effect. "Natural finishes work best to blend into the landscape and keep that authentic feel." Low-effort solutions are also great budget garden ideas to save on costs.

9. Encourage moss to grow

moss lawn in Japanese garden

Boulders and plants rise from a carpet of moss in this Japanese garden (Image credit: antony baxter / Alamy Stock Photo)

Many of us have looked up ways to get rid of moss from lawns and other areas of our outdoor spaces, but in Japanese gardens, this ancient, velvety green ground cover is embraced and encouraged. In fact, there is a Unesco World Heritage Site in Kyoto known as Kokedera, or Moss Temple, which has a famous garden with over 120 moss varieties.

Moss suitable for creating a moss lawn can be bought online and then planted in a shady area of your garden. You can also encourage it to grow on boulders – Nick says if you place them in the shade and keep them wet, moss will grow.

Another suitable ground cover plant for Japanese gardens is the Japanese spurge, available from Crocus. An evergreen, it has small white flowers in the summer.

10. Choose accessories and furniture that complement the look

The Cha no niwa - Japanese Tea Garden designed by Kazuyuki Ishihara

Traditional-style lanterns, like this one in "Cha no niwa - Japanese Tea Garden" by Kazuyuki Ishihara, are a perfect finishing touch (Image credit: Ellen Rooney / Alamy Stock Photo)

Traditional Japanese-style lanterns make perfect finishing touches to this type of garden, creating focal points within the landscape. "At Fanhams Hall, we’ve placed 25 granite lanterns throughout the garden, creating a magical ambience, especially at dusk," says Amber.

"When it comes to outdoor furniture, opt for low, minimalist pieces in natural materials like teak," says Lena Gierasinska of Barker and Stonehouse. "Benches with clean lines subtly reference Japanese aesthetics without becoming overly thematic." Shelley Cochrane, accessories buyer at Furniture Village, notes that symmetry adds balance, "so consider styling the outdoor space accordingly – think two armchairs side by side".

"Accessories should be carefully considered," Lena continues, recommending a couple of textured cushions. "Avoid clutter – every piece in a Japanese-inspired garden should have purpose and should feel integrated into the landscape, not placed on top of it.

"Lighting plays a key role, too," Lena adds, who recommends soft, indirect lighting rather than statement pieces. "I always recommend using light to highlight key features, perhaps a sculptural tree, a raked gravel area, or a water element, rather than illuminating the entire space."

FAQs

What sorts of materials should you use in a Japanese garden?

"Using natural materials like wood, gravel or bamboo is a simple way to enhance the calm, organic feel of a Japanese-style garden," says Chris.

What colour palette should you focus on in a Japanese garden?

Again, think naturalistic. Plants in various shades of green will form a peaceful backdrop, then opt for earthy tones, greys, black, and white alongside.


With the Japanese garden ideas above, you may now be eager to introduce this style to your outdoor space. But if you're interested in exploring other garden themes first, our guide has plenty to peruse, including gothic and Mediterranean looks.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/gardens/japanese-garden-ideas-advice/ LrpiG5aafaemdU5eMkebmQ Sun, 15 Jun 2025 05:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ The best plants for a pergola: 5 thriving climbers chosen by professional gardeners ]]> Is there anything more beautiful than a pergola covered in tumbling vines and flowers? These outdoor structures offer a deeply romantic element to any garden, so long as you're careful to research the best plants to grow up a pergola before you set to work.

One of the easiest ways to elevate any garden trend, a pergola isn't just a striking addition to an outdoor space; it's also an efficient garden shade idea, too, once you've covered it in climbing plants.

That being said, there are a lot of climbing plants out there, and not all are made equal when it comes to decorating a pergola. So, what do the gardening experts recommend?

You might think it's a little OTT to take your time and really consider your pergola planting scheme, but nothing could be further from the truth.

"A pergola is a natural canvas for climbers – adding height, scent and romance to any garden space. Whether you're looking to create a lush tunnel of blooms, a dappled shade canopy or a vibrant backdrop to your outdoor seating, the right plants will bring your pergola to life," promises Liam Beddall, Senior Rose Consultant at David Austin Roses.

With that in mind, here are the best plants to grow up a pergola...

1. Wisteria

garden decking area with wisteria growing over the fence

(Image credit: Claire Douglas @Clairedouglasstyling)

One of the most alluring plants around, it's little wonder that wisteria (aka the true star of Bridgerton) is widely considered one of the best plants to grow up a pergola.

"The clusters of lilac and white flowers bloom in springtime, and the vigorous vines will soon grow up and over a pergola," promises Morris Hankinson of Hopes Grove Nurseries.

He goes on to note that "wisteria does need strong support, so you should only grow this if your pergola is sturdy and strong".

"Wisteria needs pruning twice a year in summer and winter, depending on how old it is, and if you plant a young plant, it may be two or three years before it flowers. The beautiful perfume of these fragrant garden plants will be worth the wait, though."

You can buy a vigorous Chinese wisteria from Crocus in a variety of sizes.

2. Climbing roses

picture of a climbing roses on a cottage

(Image credit: Future)

Famously touted as one of the best plants to grow up a pergola is, of course, the iconic climbing rose.

"Climbing roses provide a romantic feel to any garden, with colourful, fragrant flowers. Stems will need supporting as they grow, and regular pruning will help to keep them thriving," says Morris.

If you need a little more steerage, though, don't despair; Liam Beddall knows exactly which variety of climbing rose is best for this particular job...

  • The Generous Gardener: "The elegant, pale pink flowers hang slightly nodding, adding to its cottage garden charm, and the open centres are great for pollinators," says Liam. "Plus, it’s a flexible, medium climber that works wonderfully on a pergola, especially when you want fragrance and flower power all season long."
  • Malvern Hills: "If you’re dreaming of a soft, romantic yellow rose gently tumbling over your pergola, this repeat-flowering rambler produces clusters of fully double blooms that have a light, musky scent," says Liam of this easy-to-train specimen. "With a few thorns and a graceful habit, it’s as pleasant to manage as it is to admire."
  • Phyllis Bide: "A real gem among ramblers, Phyllis Bide brings a delightful spray of small, apricot pink flowers brushed with yellow," says Liam, noting that this rambler adds a vintage charm to any structure. "Best of all, it repeats flowers reliably, making it a fantastic option for continuous interest throughout the warmer months."

3. Clematis

Clematis armandii flowering

(Image credit: Future)

You might need to learn how to prune clematis if you use this one, but it's worth doing for one of the very best plants to grow up a pergola.

"Clematis is an easy and beautiful climber, perfect for most pergolas that provide shade at the roots and sun on the leaves," says Morris.

"With so many varieties available, there is a clematis for all gardens. Why not plant a few varieties that flower at different times of the year to prolong flowering. And clematis also grows well with climbing roses, if you want a mix."

If you want the glossy foliage and snow-white blooms of the variety seen above, you can pick up the clematis armandi via Crocus.

4. Passion flower

Passionflower

(Image credit: Getty Images)

Often touted as one of the easiest flowering plants for summer, the semi-evergreen passion flower will happily scramble all over your pergola if it's in a warm and sunny spot.

"If you are looking for a more tropical feel in the garden, a passion flower could be just the climber for your pergola," suggests Morris.

"The flowers are exotic, beautiful and will flower well in full sun and well-drained soil," he says. Noting that these plants are beloved by pollinators. "Passion flowers also have the additional benefit of clinging to structures with tendrils, although some support will be useful."

You can mix things up easily by investing in the passion flower collection from Crocus, which features three different varieties of this stunner in shades of blue, white, and deep purple.

5. Grapes

Viognier wine grapes

(Image credit: Getty Images)

You'd best believe that "harvesting your garden grapes is entirely possible with a grapevine growing up and over a pergola," says Morris.

Yes, it might be one of the more underrated options, but a grapevine belongs on our list of the best plants to grow up a pergola – and for very good reason. It's an ideal Mediterranean garden idea.

"Vines will need to be tied in and gently trained to grow where you want them to, but in a few years the foliage and fruits will be hanging above your head," vows Morris, who adds that grapevines "need to be pruned hard in winter which will help more fruit to grow".

Just be sure to plant yours in full sun if you go down this route; try the grape 'Chardonnay' (available from Crocus) against a warm, sunny wall if you want a good crop.

FAQs

What is the fastest growing climber for a pergola?

If time is of the essence, you'll want to pick up the fastest-growing climber for a pergola, which means investing in something like a vigorous Chinese wisteria, a fast-spreading common white jasmine, or even the popular English ivy for its ability to scramble everywhere without support. Although for that very reason, it's always good to know how to remove ivy, should it stray too wild.

How to train plants up a pergola?

As per the Royal Horticultural Society (RHS), the easiest way to train plants up a pergola is to plant two different species near the base of each pillar (after improving the soil with compost).

"For example, [pair] a strong-growing climbing rose with a less vigorous clematis or honeysuckle, [as] the rose [will provide] additional support for the other climber," they write.

Next, you will need to angle your plants so they're leaning towards the support, using small canes if necessary to bridge the gap. "Secure vertical wires or wire mesh up the pillar and tie in shoots to these as they grow," they add, noting that flowering plants should be spiralled around the posts.

"Continue to tie new shoots to the crossbeams and laterals until the pergola is well covered," they finish.

And just like that, you know the very best plants to grow up a pergola. All that's left to do is figure out your favourite (the trickiest part) and get planting; you'll be glad you did when you're relaxing under a perfumed archway filled with blooms.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/gardens/best-plants-for-a-pergola/ DnCSYLd32vsgR9hk4JH7Ue Sat, 14 Jun 2025 05:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ 7 ways to keep cool in the garden: from 'shadescaping' to lawn maintenance ]]> Summer is a season we long for, the late warm evenings, delicious BBQ food, and finally being able to enjoy your outdoor space. But when those heatwaves hit and it becomes British-ly 'too-warm', how can you stay sweat-free in your garden?

Once the weather improves, it's easy to get lost in the new garden trends and start your essential summer gardening jobs. What we tend to forget is how humid our gardens can get when the weather gets hot.

When we want to spend time outside, whether that's lounging or mowing the lawn, it's a good idea to avoid too much heat. Which is why we reached out to gardening experts for their top tips on how to keep a garden cool this summer so you can enjoy it, heatstroke-free.

How to keep cool in the garden in summer: 7 expert tips

Keeping yourself cool in the summer applies to both indoor and outdoor activities. While it is important to know how to cool down a room inside, when you're out in the garden, you'll also want to make sure you're keeping the heat at bay.

There are several ways you can do this, from 'shadescaping' and planting ground cover plants to using key outdoor accessories.

1. Create a shaded area

picture of a pergola in english garden

(Image credit: Getty Images)

Perhaps one of the best, and most obvious, ways to keep your garden cool is to try out some garden shade ideas. There's something for every budget and style, and even a basic parasol can make a huge difference when you're out enjoying the weather.

John Foster, exterior installation and service manager at Hillarys, says, "One of the best ways to cool outside air is by creating shaded zones. Installing a freestanding pergola is a fantastic solution – it instantly provides a cool retreat in your garden."

"Pergolas with adjustable louvres and side screens are fantastic as you can control the amount of sunlight and ventilation throughout the day," he adds.

You can even add some plants that love shade in your designated spot, that way it still feels summery but just without the sun beating down.

Shop parasol options

2. Invest in an outdoor fan

It turns out that your expert fan hacks can also come in handy outside, too. There's only so much you can do to cool down the outdoor air, but a simple breeze from a fan can reduce the temperature and make you feel cooler.

An outdoor fan can be a lifesaver on sweltering hot days, creating a gentle breeze while you kick back and relax. "More often than not, fans which are safe to use outside fall into the category of portable fans, especially ones with mist settings," says Laura Honey, w&h's homes ecommerce editor.

"They have all their wiring and sockets protected inside the mechanisms of the fan itself. A really good example – and my favourite – is the Shark FlexBreeze HydroGo, which also has a mist function. It's approved for outdoor use and does a wonderful job of cooling with a breeze and a light layer of water."

3. Maintain your lawn

picture of person cutting grass

(Image credit: Getty Images)

Although the first grass cut after winter might be over and done with, maintaining your life is still a top priority.

"Keeping your grass trimmed and well-watered is not only important for the overall health of your lawn but will make it much cooler to walk on during the summer, especially key if you have children or pets that will be playing on it," explains Fiona Jenkins, gardening expert at MyJobQuote.co.uk.

In fact, why not try out essential summer lawn care tips to keep your grass green, no matter the weather.

4. Add cooling plants

In the same way, you can use houseplants to keep a room cool; the type of plants you have in your garden can affect the overall temperature.

Fiona echoes this, she says, "Certain plants can help to keep us cool in the summer. Aloe Vera is commonly grown as a houseplant, but it is a great idea to take it outside, as this plant is particularly effective at cooling the atmosphere around itself."

Learning how to care for an aloe vera couldn't be easier, either. Thanks to their tropical preferences, you needn't worry about watering them much during the summer months.

5. Opt for light-coloured furniture

garden patio with wooden decking a a white wooden bistro dining and chairs set to suggest how to keep a garden cool in summer

(Image credit: Future)

If you're looking to invest in some of the best outdoor furniture, then opt for lighter colours. Of course, if you're looking for a more monochrome garden theme, you might want darker furniture, but this won't help you cool down.

"Dark-coloured furniture and accessories absorb more heat, which can make them uncomfortable for sitting on hot days. Light-coloured furniture, cushions, and umbrellas will reflect sunlight rather than absorb it, keeping the area cooler," recommends Fiona.

6. Create a vertical garden

You might have never heard of a vertical garden, but they're not only a great way to cool your garden down, but also a creative small garden tip.

Fiona says, "Vertical gardens contribute to cooling your garden as well as adding beauty, especially if you opt for heat-resistant plants. The plants act as natural air purifiers and release moisture, which helps in reducing the surrounding temperature."

You can use trellises or wire mesh and choose your favourite climbing plants to make the most out of your vertical space. All whilst these plants help create shade and release moisture, like Fiona explains.

7. Place outdoor rugs

garden decking areas with outdoor rugs to suggest how to keep a garden cool in summer

(Image credit: Future | Dominic Blackmore | Joanna Henderson)

What better time to pick up one of the best outdoor rugs on the market than the summertime? They're not extremely chic, but they can have a surprising difference in how warm you feel in your garden, even helping transform your garden on a budget.

"Outdoor rugs are great for enhancing the aesthetic of a patio area, but can also keep the floor cool. Rugs made of natural materials such as jute and bamboo have better heat resistance, and light colours are preferable for reflecting sunlight," explains Fiona.

Just make sure you know how to clean your outdoor rug before your next garden party, to keep it looking pristine.

Shop outdoor rugs

FAQs

Can plants help keep your garden cool?

It's not just aloe vera that can help reduce the temperature in your garden; ground cover plants and trees for pots can make a huge difference too.

"Plants can naturally cool your garden by providing shade, releasing moisture through transpiration, and covering the ground to reduce heat absorption. Trees can provide shade and offer broad canopies that block direct sunlight," explains Luke Dejahang, gardening expert and Director at Crown Pavillions.

"Ground covers such as creeping thyme or ajuga help keep the soil cool, while climbing plants like grapevines or wisteria can shade walls and pergolas," he adds.

How do you cool outside air?

As mentioned previously, it's pretty difficult to cool down outdoor air, but you can still make some changes to your garden to make it feel less hot.

"Whilst you technically can't cool the air with your own hands, you can create cool spaces to make the air appear cooler. Adding water features like fountains or ponds can make the air appear cooler through evaporation. If you want to use a mechanical method, bring a fan outside and plug it into an external outdoor plug to improve air circulation," recommends Luke.

This could be a great opportunity to try out some small pond ideas, that way you're also introducing some new wildlife to your garden and keeping yourself cool.


If you're struggling with the heat in your home, you might be making some common cooling mistakes. Knowing what hacks to try and which ones don't work can help regulate your temperature, but also save you money in electricity costs.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/gardens/how-to-keep-cool-in-the-garden-in-summer/ 9P8rHmxnUhE5kzhgjuGaR6 Thu, 12 Jun 2025 05:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ A property expert reveals the one paint colour that can make any room look and feel more expensive ]]> Deciding on which colour you should paint a room can be a hard choice, but if you're looking for a luxe, expensive finish, then there's only one option, according to property experts.

Whether or not you tend to follow the interior paint colour trends, certain shades stand the test of time better than others and for good reason. These colours can completely transform a space by giving it a polished, luxurious feel and making any room feel more expensive.

The paint colour to make a room look expensive

In the same way, there are paint colours that devalue your home, there are certain shades that will make it appear more expensive. And sometimes, all you need to transform your home and elevate its look is a wash of the right colour.

"People think you need to rip out kitchens or spend thousands on new flooring to make a home feel more valuable,” says Terry Fisher, property expert at Sold.co.uk. “But actually, one of the simplest and cheapest ways to elevate a space is to get the paint colour right. It’s all about creating the right atmosphere – and one colour in particular does that perfectly.”

So, what is the colour that can achieve so much? Terry reveals it's navy blue.

picture of navy painted living room

(Image credit: Future)

Step aside, pistachio green decor; if you want your home to look expensive, the classic navy blue hue is the way to go.

"Navy blue is timeless, elegant, and makes a room feel instantly more refined,” he said. “It’s bold enough to add drama, but subtle enough to remain tasteful. Whether you use it on walls, doors or even kitchen cabinets, it creates a sense of depth and sophistication that buyers respond to,” explains Terry.

He even awards it one of the best living room colours, thanks to its bold yet welcoming depth.

“I’ve seen homes that felt fairly average on paper completely transformed just by adding a navy blue feature wall or repainting old furniture in a deep navy shade,” adds Terry. “It’s a colour that suggests quality, and it helps smaller spaces feel more considered and styled.”

picture of navy bedroom with dark wooden accents

(Image credit: Future)

And it's not all about aesthetics either. Terry points out that navy blue is a calm and composed colour that creates a sense of order. He says, "It signals that the home has been well cared for, and that care is a subtle value-add when it comes to how people perceive the property.”

So, how can you transform your living room on a budget with navy?

"Go for a matte or eggshell finish rather than high gloss – it looks more sophisticated,” suggests Terry. “And if you’re unsure, start small. Even painting a door or an alcove in navy blue can give a space a completely new feel.”

You can also introduce navy touches via different types of home decor, like bed sheets, vases and wall art. Use it as a way to add personality to your home while making the most of the luxurious appeal it offers.

Shop navy paint and home accessories


Whilst we recommend taking inspiration from the annual interior colour trends, it's always good to prioritise your taste too. Unless you're actively trying to sell your home, it's good to remember that it's all about what you love the most!

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/homes-news/property-expert-reveals-paint-colour-to-make-room-look-expensive/ VjrDgzvmEgV2wD4tjfSCuG Wed, 11 Jun 2025 05:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ As a former barista, this is my favourite way to make cold brew coffee at home ]]> Rain or shine, I like my coffee cold. Whilst an ice coffee can be refreshing on a really sunny day, the way that it’s brewed can make it a little bit acidic and a lot less sweet, so, last year, I set out to find the perfect way to make cold brew coffee. The answer is very simple: with the OXO Good Grips Cold Brew Coffee Maker.

Even though this is one of the best coffee makers I’ve tested, the OXO isn’t what you’ll expect. You don’t need a plug, or a kettle, or any electricity at all to make a delicious cold coffee in here. Instead, what you'll be making is cold brew coffee.

If you’ve stumbled on this review and you’re not quite sure what cold brew coffee is, everything will make a lot more sense with an explainer. Cold brew coffee is made using a different extraction process. Rather than use high pressure and temperature to extract oils from your grounds, they steep in room temperature water (or in the fridge) for at least 16 hours. This process is a lot more gentle, which means that you don’t get an acidic note to your coffee. Instead, it’ll be a lot smoother and sweeter. It’s actually the way lots of non-coffee drinkers end up jumping into coffee, because it’s a really palatable way to consume your caffeine. Dangerous, right?

I’ll talk you through how to make a cold brew coffee in the OXO Good Grips so that you can work out whether it’s the right coffee maker for you. I won’t give the game away, but if you’re looking for a way to enjoy naturally sweeter, cold coffee, you’ve come to the right person.

OXO Good Grips Coffee Maker Specifications

OXO Good Grips Coffee Maker

(Image credit: OXO)

Dimensions

24.2D x 24.2W x 37.4H cm

Capacity

900 ml

Filter

Stainless steel or paper

Weight

1.68 kgs

Unboxing the OXO Good Grips Coffee Maker

Unboxing the OXO Good Grips Coffee Maker

(Image credit: Future)

OXO sends their Good Grips Cold Brew Coffee Maker in a simple, cardboard box. It will feel like it’s far too light to have anything capable of making coffee inside, but it does. Lots of parts of the Good Grips are crafted from plastic, but it still feels really premium.

The whole set is made up of a BPA-free plastic stand, brewing container, rainhead, and filter. Then, you'll also get a delicate glass jar which comes with an airtight stopper. I thought I might end up smashing this, but it's been nearly two years and I still have mine in perfect condition.

The only downside of this whole unboxing experience is that OXO used some soft plastic for their packaging. It’s not unusual for a cheaper product to come with this kind of catch and you can recycle soft plastics, so it’s not a total disaster, but I have to note it down.

Who would the OXO Good Grips Coffee Maker suit?

OXO Good Grips Coffee Maker brewing chamber

(Image credit: Future)

The OXO Good Grips Cold Brew Coffee Maker is ideal for anyone ready to commit to making cold brew in generous batches. If you're brewing for a household rather than just yourself, this model delivers, producing enough concentrate for around 40 cups of coffee in one go, which easily lasted my family half a week. There’s a more compact version available if you're sipping solo, but this one really shines when serving multiple people. Just be aware that it requires some counter or fridge space, as the coffee needs to steep for at least 16–18 hours.

Because of that long brewing time, the OXO is best suited to more dedicated cold brew drinkers, especially those happy to plan ahead. While you only need to prep once for a week's worth of coffee, it does require a bit of foresight. If you're more spontaneous or short on time, you might prefer a model like those in De’Longhi’s range, which can deliver cold brew in as little as five minutes.

That said, the OXO Good Grips is a smart, beginner-friendly way to explore cold brew without spending a fortune. I actually like how it looks on the counter, and the price is reasonable compared to many coffee machines. You could use a cafetière as a cheaper alternative, but if it’s in demand elsewhere in the house, having a dedicated brewer like this is a great backup.

What is the OXO Good Grips Coffee Maker like to use?

Base stand for the OXO Good Grips Coffee Maker

(Image credit: Future)

Getting the OXO Good Grips brewing is really straightforward. Start by aligning the brewing container and stand with the filter cap, making sure it’s in the closed position. This part is crucial, or you’ll end up with coffee all over your counter. (Trust me, I’ve made that mistake so you don’t have to.)

OXO recommends a 1:4 coffee-to-water ratio, which I followed. Scoop your coffee (a coarse grind works best) into the base, then pour water over the top using the built-in rainmaker. I suggest pouring in slow, circular motions to help saturate the grounds evenly; this encourages a smoother, sweeter flavour. The rainmaker is designed to distribute water across the bed of coffee, and it does a great job, but a little manual help doesn’t hurt.

Rainhead on the OXO Good Grips Coffee Maker

(Image credit: Future)

One of the clever design touches is that the carafe has volume markers, so you can use it to measure water directly from the tap which means no extra measuring jug needed, and one less thing to wash up.

The water filtered through the grounds faster than I expected, and I had the lid on and the brewer set aside within just over three minutes of filling the carafe. From there, it’s all about patience. Leave the brewer to sit for 12–24 hours while the coffee develops its flavour.

Stopper on the OXO Good Grips Coffee Maker

(Image credit: Future)

After 20 hours, I placed the brewing container on the stand, positioned the carafe underneath, and let the concentrate filter through. This can take over five minutes, depending on how fine your coffee or filter is, so it’s a good time to get a chore done. It may be slow, but it’s absolutely worth it. Unlike less effective cold brew systems that let stray grounds sneak into your cup, the OXO’s filtering is flawless.

Coffee made in the OXO Good Grips Coffee Maker

(Image credit: Future)

Within five minutes, my cold brew concentrate had finished dripping into the glass carafe. It didn’t look like a large amount at first glance, but since cold brew concentrate is meant to be diluted (typically at a 1:1 or 2:1 ratio) it was more than enough for three servings. I also tested a larger batch, filling the carafe to serve 14 people, and that took 18 minutes and 34 seconds to fully filter through.

Cleaning the OXO Good Grips Coffee Maker

OXO Good Grips Coffee Maker being washed up

(Image credit: Future)

All the parts of the OXO are dishwasher safe and the filters can go in the green bin, which makes cleaning up after yourself really easy. I washed mine by hand, because the different components feel quite fragile. It is still quite an inexpensive model and I couldn’t see smashing and cracking happening really easily.

You won’t need to do this often, as the container that you brew into comes with a stopper, which means that you can keep it in the fridge without needing to worry about finding another container to decant your coffee into.

When everything's dry, you can stack all the components inside the stand, which means it takes up a lot less space in the cupboard or on the counter when it's not in use.

How does the OXO Good Grips Coffee Maker compare?

I am a big cold brew fan. Last year, I tested all of the best cold brew coffee makers for our sister brand and this is the one that came out on top. I like the smaller OXO for singles, but this was my favourite overall. If you don’t go for this, you should just make it in a cafetière.

The only reason I wouldn’t buy the OXO is if you’re looking to make a larger investment in a bigger bean to cup coffee machine. Lots of De’Longhi’s models can make you cold brew in under five minutes, which is significantly quicker than your 16 hour wait with OXO. I actually have ended up using the De’Longhi La Specialista Touch to make mine. It has all the smooth flavours of cold brew down to a tee, but I don’t need to have prepared my drink massively in advance. Of course, there’s a jump in price, but I love my coffee, so I’m happy to splurge on a lovely machine.

Should you buy the OXO Good Grips Coffee Maker?

OXO Good Grips Coffee Maker brewing chamber

(Image credit: Future)

If you want a simple, dedicated way to steep cold brew, this is perfect, the OXO comes in at a reasonable price, it looks great, and it’s easy to use too. What’s not to love?

How we test

OXO Good Grips Coffee Maker components

(Image credit: Future)

As a former barista, I head up all of our coffee tests at woman&home. Cold brew coffee is really straightforward because I’m only ever making one drink. Nonetheless, I make notes on how stood the guidance on offer is, whether the coffee actually tastes good, and how it looks on the counter. I have really high standards and none of my reviews are sponsored, so anything you read is coming straight from the barista’s cup.

If you want to find out more about how we test coffee machines at woman&home, you can visit our dedicated page.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/oxo-good-grips-cold-brew-coffee-maker-review/ AFsCtse5qtoJaprgV8Loac Mon, 09 Jun 2025 06:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ Naturally cooling and ultra cosy, these sheets are my worst-kept secret ]]>

These beautiful sheets are sold as a set or separately, so you can mix and match. Prices start at £85 and you can choose any size up to Emperor.View Deal

I discovered Secret Linen Store in the best possible way — by complete accident. It was like being set up on a blind date with a brand. I’d popped into the Button & Sprung showroom in London — home to one of the best mattresses I’ve ever slept on — and there, sharing the space, was Secret Linen Store. That’s when I quite literally fell into their luxurious bedding.

As luck would have it, Molly, one of the brand’s founders, was in-store that day. She wasn’t trying to give me a sales pitch, but the way she spoke — with such genuine passion about their ethically sourced Portuguese linen and refreshingly transparent production process — completely won me over.

Now, I’m not usually one for splurging, so I left the store, did my research, and eventually decided to invest in a set which turned out to be some of the best bedding I've ever slept on. With linen prices creeping up, there’s a lot of sub-par stuff out there. But this se is a total gem. And I’m ready to share the (not-so-secret) magic of Secret Linen Store with you.

Specifications

Secret Linen Store Natural Sid Stripe Linen on the bed with a throw

(Image credit: Future)

Sizes available

Single-Emperor

Composition

Pure Portuguese linen

Colourway options

Over 32

Care advice

Wash at 40 degrees no ironing needed

Tumble dryer safe

Yes, but use a low temperature

Composition

Secret Linen Store Natural Sid Stripe Linen buttons

(Image credit: Future)

One of the things I love most about Secret Linen Store’s sheets (aside from how dreamy they feel) is knowing exactly what’s gone into them (and what hasn’t). They’re made from 100% flax linen, woven in Portugal, and proudly OEKO-TEX® certified, which means they’re completely free from any nasties. So you can genuinely sleep easy. The flax itself is a bit of an overachiever too: it uses less water than cotton, needs very little in the way of pesticides or fertilisers, and is kind to the soil it grows in. And because linen is naturally breathable and moisture-wicking, it keeps you cool on stuffy nights and cosy when it’s chilly. In short, it’s the kind of bedding that works hard in the background while you just drift off.

Who would it suit?

Secret Linen Store Natural Sid Stripe Linen on the whole bed

(Image credit: Future)

Secret Linen Store's linen is an unbeatable natural fibre when it comes to night sweats and hot sleepers. It’s light as air and brilliant at letting your skin breathe, whilst wicking away moisture and drying quickly. I love layering linen on my bed in the summer months, but it can actually be a little too cool for me in the winter, which says it all really.

The linen look is also great when you’re opting for a cosy and inviting bed set up. You don’t need to iron Secret Linen Store's linen — although you can — so most people lean into the inviting, warm colours on offer. And Secret Linen Store’s collection of these sheets is vast when it comes to styling. They have over 30 different colours and designs that you can chose between, which means that you can match any colour scheme.

Another reason why you’ll love these sheets might be if you’re watching your environmental footprint. The natural flax used to craft these is OEKO TEX certified — great for sensitive skin too — and dyed using natural colouring. Secret Linen Store has a whole section on their page about their sustainability commitments. It makes for feed-good reading.

What is it like to sleep on?

Secret Linen Store Natural Sid Stripe Linen base sheet

(Image credit: Future)

I’ll give you a quick summary: I love these sheets. Secret Linen Store has put all the effort into the luxury touches, which make this really nice to sleep on.

For a start, making the bed was easy. They’re generous with the size, so my king-size base sheet stretched easily around my mattress. There’s not so much excess that you’ll get rumples and big creases, but there’s enough to stop you from breaking out a sweat when you’re making the bed. The same easy, roomy sizing applies for the pillows and duvet cover, which has some nice button fastenings that are subtle and easy to secure.

Secret Linen Store Natural Sid Stripe Linen pillows

(Image credit: Future)

One of the luxuries of Secret Linen Store’s bedding is that they pre-wash it for you, which softens some of linen’s initial crispness. The sheets only get softer the more you wash them (that’s the nature of linen), but these felt like they were a few washes in already — only in the best way.

I love how they look on my bed and I loved sleeping in them even more. The weather was fluctuating between warmth and cold — some days I needed a big coat and others I was in shorts — and the sheets did a great job at regulating my temperature. When it was hot, I woke up with my skin feeling fresh, rather than clammy. There were nights when I didn’t wake up from the heat at all, but even on those that I did wake up, the sheets had markedly helped.

When it was cooler and I was throwing on layers, the sheets still kept me at a nice temperature. I have an electric blanket, which I used, but I wasn’t cold in bed.

Cleaning

Secret Linen Store Natural Sid Stripe Linen duvet stretched out

(Image credit: Future)

The Secret Linen Store has lots of advice on how to care for your pure bed linen because "linen sheets need to be treated slightly differently to get the best from them." They recommend using a cool wash with fabric softener at between 30-40 degrees. You can wash it at a hotter temperature, but it will be stuffer.

They recommend separating your laundry, so you don't get any colour transfer. They say that you'll also what to "be careful when choosing your laundry detergent to make sure that there are nasties in there that can affect the colour of your bed linen. 'Optic whiteners' and other bleaching agents can cause colour loss and leave marks on your laundry.

When it comes to drying your sheets, the Secret Linen Store says "because these fabrics hold a lot of water, we recommend giving your them an extra spin to remove as much water as possible." If you want a tumble dryer, they recommend a cooler temperature as well as line drying. Then, if you want it ironed, you will want it to be a little damp. Mine dried really quickly and really nicely, so I think you'll enjoy how low maintenance these are.

Secret Linen Store also reassures you that your sheets will get softer over time. I actually think that they're really soft for fresh linen as it is. They pre-launder the bedding, so that it arrives slightly warn-in for you. The idea that things are only getting better is sublime.

How does it compare?

Piglet In Bed Gingham Bedding on the bed

(Image credit: Future)

I’ve slept in lots of variations from the classic set of linen sheets, because they’re so great for hot sleepers. My favourite — and the set I go back to time and time again — is Piglet In Bed’s Gingham Set. In truth, these sheets feel almost identical. The Piglet In Bed set was softer against my skin at first (I think the pre-washing is more intense), but the Secret Linen Store set softened over time too. With similar patterns and designs on offer, the two sets are almost identical. I prefer the wooden buttons on the base of the Piglet In Bed sheets and they come with handy drying hooks inside the duvet, but that’s tiny extra.

If you’re looking to save some money and you still want to enjoy the feel of linen, I would recommend talking a look at Dunelm’s cotton linen blend. Of course, these aren’t as light and soft as pure linen, but they’re 70% of the way there and they cost a fraction of the price. There also isn’t as much choice in the way of pattern, but again, if you want to save money, it’s a great secret.

Should you buy it?

Secret Linen Store Natural Sid Stripe Linen packaging

(Image credit: Future)

If you want the best of the best that the world of linen has to offer, look no further. These sheets are exceptionally soft and a real treat to sleep in. Naturally, they’re at the pricy end of sheets, but they’re well worth the investment, especially if you’re a hot sleeper.

How we test

At woman&home, all of our bedding reviews come from weeks upon weeks upon weeks of testing. I‘ve been using these sheets on rotation since February and will continue to sleep in them, whilst updating this review, going forward.

To give you a good gauge of what the sheets are like, I make notes on all the elements that you need to know. I talk about whether they’re cooling, soft, and nice to sleep under. You’ll also get insights into what they are like to clean, how they compare to other sheets that I love, and what the composition really means for you. By the end of my review, you should have a great idea of what the sheets are like to sleep on. If not, don’t hesitate to email me. I’m always happy to talk about all things sleep and sheets.

You can find out more about our testing process on our dedicated page for how we test bed sheets.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/secret-linen-store-natural-sid-stripe-linen-review/ eNokvsbnd5bp4S3DeuPaXG Sun, 08 Jun 2025 14:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ My family runs a pizza business – these are the 9 ovens that actually impressed us ]]> Nothing gets people outside and gathered together quite like a pizza oven. My family started using them when I was 13, so it’s safe to say I’ve grown up cooking with flames — and I’ve been hooked ever since. It’s one of the many reasons why I think every garden, balcony, and even kitchen should have a pizza oven.

For years, pizza ovens followed a fairly predictable format, but recently the market has exploded with innovation. Electric models now offer a fuss-free, air fryer–like experience, while gas ovens give you precise control — especially those clever ones with rotating pizza stones, perfect for beginners. And of course, there’s the timeless charm of wood-fired ovens, delivering that unbeatable smoky flavour.

With summer on the horizon, I’ve been putting the best pizza ovens to the test — roping in my family (who’ve run a pizza business for over a decade) to help me assess everything from big names like Ninja to pizza-specialist brands like Gozney and Ooni. So whether you’re just getting started with outdoor cooking or you’re ready to take your homemade pizzas to the next level, here’s everything you need to know to choose the right oven.

The quick list

The best pizza ovens, tested by industry experts

Pizzas cooked in the Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven and Air Fryer

(Image credit: Future)

I put all our pizza ovens through the same series of tests to get a good gauge of who they'll be best suited to. Not only did I cook many, many pizzas in each oven, I also experimented with nachos, vegetable skillets, cookies, and other recipes that brands recommended that we tested out. To see the results of my top picks, keep scrolling.

Best pizza oven for enthusiasts

1. Gozney Arc

Best pizza oven for ethusiasts

RRP: £599.99 | Dimensions: W 48 x D 56.4 x H 34.2 cm | Weight: 21.5 Kg | Fuel type: Gas and wood | Temperature range: Up to 500°C

Compact, yet sleek design
Dual-fuel options
Easy to control and use
Robust, top-quality build
Expensive for some

Any research into the world of pizza ovens will have shone a spotlight on Gozney. These pizza ovens are the crème de la creme for build quality, cooking capacity, aesthetics, and user-experience. My family — the ones that run the pizza business — cook on Gozney's commercial ovens and the Arc is just a mini version of those. In the summer, I swear I don’t touch my oven. I cook exclusively in here.

I’ll work from the outside in. Gozney’s ovens are beautiful. They look like something from a glossy Scandinavian magazine. They’re easy to set up and the extra features — such as an exterior thermometer and pizza stand — are seamlessly stylish. Setting them up is easy and cooking in the Gozney Arc is just as lovely. I made delicious, evenly cooked pizzas in here and have continued to use the Arc for almost two years in my garden, where I've hosted Mexican nights (you can cook wraps and fillings in the oven); tapas nights (falafels work really well in here too); and I've even made a roast dinner in here.

That all goes to say that if you have the money to spend, this is a smart investment. It’ll last you for a long time and you’ll get the admiration of all your friends. The one catch is that some of the smart accessories (the stand, cover, and peel) are all sold separately, so you need to buy these separately. It could blow your budget, but if you'll use this as much as I do, it's worth investing in them. My final piece of advice is to check out Gozney’s recipes too — you’ll be making peanut butter brownies, nachos, wraps, and curries in no time.

You can find out more in my full review.

Best pizza oven for beginners

Morsø Forno Spin

Best pizza oven for beginners

RRP: £499.99 | Dimensions: 35 H x 57 W x 53 D cm | Weight: 17.11 kgs | Fuel type: Gas (stone is rotated using electrics) | Temperature range: Up to 450°

Elegant design looks smart and premium
Really well-priced for the quality and performance
Electronic pizza stone is a game-changer for beginners
Versatile and speedy at cooking pizzas and more
Need to be careful with children as top gets hot

The place that everyone trips up with pizza ovens is turning the pizza. It’s very easy to thrust your perfect pizza into the flames at the back or the side of the oven — or to get distracted by guests and burn one half of the pizza. The simple solution that opens up pizza ovens for everyone from beginners to experts is Morsø's rotating pizza stone. Most pizza ovens that have this feature still require you to manually turn the stone, but the Forno Spin has an electric control, that you can leave to work its magic, freeing up brain space to enjoy the outdoors whilst your oven cooks the perfect pizza.

Not only is the Morsø Forno Spin attractive — following Gozney in the pebble-like look of the pizza oven — it’s lovely to use. I cooked even, delicious pizza in here with almost no error. I also made brownies, nachos, bread, wraps, grilled vegetables, and more in the Morsø Forno Spin. The sheer simplicity made it really motivating to return to time and time again. I found myself excited to cook in here.

My friends, who had never cooked in a pizza oven before, were able to match my decade of training thanks to the quality and ease of design that is so intrinsic to Morsø . To top it all off, this is a great price. It’s not the cheapest pizza oven, but if you want quality, this is one of the best places you can spend your money.

The only downside is that the oven is gas powered, but the wheel is electric. You’ll need a socket and gas cylinder nearby to have it working at full capacity, which limits where you’ll put it outside.

You can find out more in my full review.

Best wood fired pizza oven

Delivita Wood Fired Pizza Oven

Best wood-fired pizza oven

RRP: £899.99 | Dimensions: 590mm x 650mm x 350mm | Weight: 30 Kg | Fuel type: Wood | Temperature range: Up to 550°C

Chic, colourful design options
Makes delicious pizza and wood fired food
Fire is easy to control and manage (even if you're a beginner)
Heat-proof exterior
Expensive if you want dual-fuel option

Some people want to enjoy pizza ovens as they were intended: cooked by wood-fired flames, the Italian way. Going back to the roots might take more time and investment: you need to watch your fire constantly and learn special tricks, but with the DeliVita, it pays off.

Not only is this a gorgeous oven — I’ve never seen one with such personality, especially with all the colour options — it’s totally heat proof, so you could sit it anywhere in your garden without a care in the world. Mine was placed on an IKEA bistro table and, Marco, DeliVita’s expert, assured me that his has sat on the exact same table without a hitch for months upon months.

Flavour-wise, the DeliVita is hard to beat. The fire gives food flavour and character like no other pizza oven. If I closed my eyes, the pizza I made in the DeliVita could have been slid onto my table in authentic pizzeria in Naples. I also made some delicious Italian classics, including a vegetable bruschetta and veggie skillet, but could nail the more left-field tasks that I set it (including making a deliciously soft, sweet cookie) too.

The only downside of a wood-fired oven is that you have to buy kiln-dried wood and even then it’ll smoke a lot. I live in a zone where we can’t actually have outdoor fires, which meant I had to travel around to get this set up and tested. It’s worth it if you’re willing to learn the tricks of the wood fired trade — and will certainly wow guests with the flavours — but might not suit shy beginners.

You can find out more in my full review

Best electric pizza oven

Ninja Artisan Pizza Oven

Best electric pizza oven

RRP: £299.99 | Dimensions: H32 x W42 x D59cm | Weight: 11.9 kgs | Fuel type: Electric | Temperature range:

Makes incredible pizza every time
Excellent value for money
Multiple different functions including air frying
Patio-friendly and electric
Not as pretty as some

I love Ninja. I think they make some of the best air fryers and other kitchen appliances, but did I think they would be shoulder-to-shoulder with the likes of Gozney? No. Was I totally wrong? Yes.

The Ninja Artisan Pizza Oven well and truly knocked me off my feet. It warmed up in fifteen minutes and cooked my pizzas perfectly in just three more minutes. There's a handy timer and even controls that would let you play around with the temperature and time, but you won't need to. Ninja serves-up simple perfection on a plate, or should I say pizza stone? I'm serious though. This made some of the best pizzas on test, which I didn't expect. The crusts puffed up, the sauce was sweet, and my cheese was golden brown and stringy. I'm getting hungry just thinking about it again.

You've also got an air fryer function (which is good for an outdoor air fryer, but not as good as Ninja's dedicated models), as well as a prove and bake setting. That makes this one of the most obviously versatile ways to cook more than pizza outside. To the Ninja Artisan's credit, I made some impressive focaccia, cookies, nachos, and veggies in here and I really enjoyed the level of control that an electric oven has to offer.

The other boon of having an electric oven like this is that it can sit on balconies and patios, unlike gas and wood-fired alternatives. That makes it much more accessible for lots of homes. The only downside is that this isn't quite as beautiful as some of the more expensive models, but with the pizzas that this churned out, I'm willing to overlook a boxy design.

You can find out more in my full review.

Best gas pizza oven

Gozney Dome S1 Pizza Oven

Best gas pizza oven

RRP: £1,399 | Dimensions: 70 x 80 x 56 cm | Weight: 48.6 kgs | Fuel type: Gas (rolling flame) | Temperature range: 500˚C

Dual-fuel options
Can fit 2-3 pizzas in at once
Easy to control and set up
Looks really smart
Durable build (I've had these ovens for decades)
Expensive - the stand and cover cost extra too

I could fill a whole guide with Gozney: the Dome S1 is a stellar example of why. It’s slightly bigger than the Arc, so you could squeeze a couple of pizza in, or generally enjoy a more spacious cooking environment for all your fire-powered foods.

I’ve found the Dome to be really durable — it’s an oven that you can leave in the garden and not worry about — and really it's also really forgiving if you're not yet smooth with how you shuffle your pizzas around in the oven.

The Gozney Dome S1 warms up quickly; you’ll be able to cook lots of creative dishes in here; and it looks great too. My latest success in this was a curry night: I slow cooked curry in the day and made some sensational naan breads when my guests arrived. I've also made a bigger roast dinner in here (I tested that in the Gozney Arc too) as well as some amazing tray bakes.

As with all Gozney pizza ovens, you’re paying a little more than the likes of Ninja or Ooni, but I don’t know a single person who regrets their purchase. Gozney owners are proud and I’ve had lots of confessions from owners of less expensive ovens saying that they wished they had splurged on one as substantial as this.

You can find out more in my full review

Best multi-fuel pizza oven

Woody Pizza Oven

Best multi-fuel pizza oven

RRP: £250 | Dimensions: W 48 x D 56.4 x H 34.2 cm | Weight: 12.5 Kg | Fuel type: Gas, coal, and wood | Temperature range: Up to 500°C

Excellent value for money
Multi-fuel options - coal, gas, and wood
Compact and easy to position
Simple to use
Not as robust as some models
Gas set-up is quite fiddly

You won’t find a pizza oven that’s actually worth buying for any cheaper than this. Actually, you won’t find a triple fuel pizza oven that’s cheaper or smaller than this. So, if you are new to pizza making, or you want the flexibility to mix up the furl you use, this is a brilliant place to start.

The beauty of the Woody Pizza Oven is that it comes as a kit. You get your cover, your pizza peel, and all your attachments included, so the price of the oven on the Woody site is exactly what you’ll pay. Woody also provides lots of helpful videos for how to set the Woody up, because it's a little more fiddly with all the different attachments, but once you've dedicated about 30 minutes to getting it in place, you'll be proud of your work. You have to admit, it looks pretty good too, especially for the price.

I made some nice pizza, as well as grilled vegetables and cookies in the Woody. I think anyone would be suitably impressed with it, especially in the context of its price tag. Having cooked on the Gozney and Morso, I know that there are sleeker designs, more sensitive thermometers, and more robust builds. However, for a novice, that doesn’t really matter. This does everything you’d need.

You can find out more in my full review.

Best budget pizza oven

Tefal Jamie Oliver Pizza Oven

Best budget pizza oven

RRP: £300 | Dimensions: 69.3 x 50 x 34 cm | Weight: 10.93 kg | Fuel type: Liquefied Petroleum Gas | Temperature range: 400°C

Beginner-friendly spinning stone makes cooking easy
Quick and consistent cooking
Slim, simple design that suits small spaces
Great price point
Single-fuel
Relatively crude settings
Quite heavy to move aroun

Jamie Oliver is the king of casual cooking and his pizza oven is a brilliant example of why. Reasonably priced, with a neat, rotating pizza stone in the base, it’s a brilliant entry-level option for anyone new to the world of pizza ovens.

Given that I've just talked about what exceptional value the Woody pizza oven is, you might wonder why this (a £50 more expensive one) is my budget choice. I gave this Jamie Oliver Tefal oven the award, because it comes with simplicity as well as a great price tag. The Woody is great, but it can be fiddly and I think that deters people that don't fancy playing around with the different fuel types. Jamie's oven, on the other hand, is super simple.

Another aspect of Tefal's easy, breezy design is the dial. This is connected to the pizza stone and it'll let you rotate the pizza inside the oven without needing the skills of an Italian pizza chef. There are some ovens that can do this automatically, but it’s actually nice to have some control — it lets you focus on cooking your pizzas exactly where you want them.

I made delicious dishes — from a classic pizza through to cookies and nachos — in good time in here. My only caveats are that you need to set aside a couple of hours the first time that you use it — the instructions ask for a lot of heating. The oven also gets quite hot, so keep it high up and away from children. Aside from that, it's good fun, great value, and a really accessible model. Of course. It’s Jamie Oliver after all.

You can find out more in my full review.

Fastest pizza oven

Ooni Karu 2 Pizza Oven

(Image credit: Ooni)

Ooni Karu 12

Fastest pizza oven

RRP: £350 | Dimensions: 76.5 H x 41.4 W x 72 D cm | Weight: 15.3 kgs | Fuel type: Wood or gas | Temperature range: 500 °C

Portable and easy to move around
Wide fuel tray makes it easy to light
Multi-fuel sources
Gas burner sold separately

The iconic Karu is one you'll recognise from just about everywhere. This powerhouse is a favourite amongst influencers and it doesn't take much to work out why. The compact design weighs in at 16 kgs, making it easy to pick up and pop on a heat-proof table outdoors, but you could also take it camping or on your travels.

The impressive oven can reach 500 °C, promising to cook pizza in 60 seconds. I'm in the process of writing up a formal review for this model, but have taken this for a spin at my friend's place and it really is every bit as speedy as it promises to be. And that doesn't leave your ingredients raw — it actually crisps the bases and chars the veggies to absolute perfection.

You've got the benefit of cooking with wood, charcoal, or gas when it comes to the Karu 2, although the gas attachment is sold separately, so don't get caught out if you want to use both. I love the spacious grate, which makes it easy to stack wood into and it actually makes cleaning up the ashes really easy.

Lots of people love the clear glass door that lets you watch the pizza cook, whilst keeping all the heat inside, hence the speedy cheffing. And if you're worried about it fogging up, the team has integrated special technology that has been endlessly praised online, It doesn't mist up.

I am still formally testing the Karu 2, but these are some initial thoughts. I'll update you with a proper review once I've got the pizza sauce off my hands.

Best indoor outdoor pizza oven

Ooni Volt 12 Pizza Oven

(Image credit: Ooni)

Ooni Volt 12

Best indoor outdoor pizza oven

RRP: £799 | Dimensions: H28 x W53 x D62cm | Weight: 18 kgs | Fuel type: Electric | Temperature range: 450°C

The weather can be unpredictable (at the best of times), so if you're planning a pizza party and the clouds come over, it's really helpful to have a pizza oven that works indoors and outdoors. I'd argue that it's more helpful than a guest willing to hold an umbrella over the poor dedicated pizza chef all evening. For this precise reason, I love the Volt 12.

Ooni makes exceptionally good pizza ovens and this is their first foray into the all-electric world. Customers all agree that it delivers on its promise to produce perfect pizza in 90 seconds, which is really speedy. It warms up to 450°C in 20 minutes, which is bang on average for a pizza oven. Whilst some might spot that 450°C is a little lower for a maximum temperature in an oven, I wouldn't recommend cooking a pizza over 350°C, so you're not losing out.

Beginners seem to love the programmed, which help you to pick the perfect temperature for the kind of pizza you're cooking (a Detroit pizza will need more heat than a Neapolitan, for example), but if you're confident, you can scrap the pre-sets all together.

One of the stand-out extras seemed to be the 13" cooking area, which gives you room to roll an unusually shaped pizza (I would aim for a 10-12 inch base). You'll need to wait for it to cool and dry before you move it, so it's worth investing in an oven cover, if you want yours to really last out its warranty period.

I'm still testing the Volt 12, so these are my initial thoughts. You'll get a full update as soon as I am finished.

How we test pizza ovens

Pizzas cooked in the Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven and Air Fryer

(Image credit: Future)

I’ve been leading the testing at woman&home because my family is in the business of pizza. That means that my weekends, evenings, and school holidays were dominated by cooking in pizza ovens (and, to be honest, they still are).

I have tested all of these with my family, so that we have cast our commercial, expert eyes on the pizza ovens. I've also made sure to test alongside some friends who have never cooked in pizza ovens before, because not everyone approaches pizza ovens from a commercial perspective and I want to see how and where each oven appeals to total beginners. I don’t normally have a crowd for testing, but people seem to come out of the woodwork when they catch a whiff of pizza. Can you blame them?

My tests cover all the basics — making endless pizzas — through to vegetable skillets, nachos, cookies and brownies. I like to test the versatility of a pizza oven, which means determining whether it can do speedy and slow cooking. In my reviews, I’ll also talk about what a pizza oven is like to set up, clean up after, and I’ll compare it to other models on the market. That way, you’ll get a really comprehensive idea of what these ovens are like to live with.

If you still have questions, don’t hesitate to email me. I’m always happy to chat about these, possibly over a slice of pizza. Don't forget that you can read more about how we test pizza ovens on our dedicated page.

How to choose a pizza oven

When you’re buying a pizza oven, there are a few factors to take into consideration. I’ll talk you through these here, with some of my insights into how to find the right one for you.

Price: if you want a pizza oven that's decent, your budget will need to start around £250. These ovens might not be pretty, or they might be flimsy in some places, but they're a great place to start and will definitely show you whether pizza ovens are your thing. As you get more serious, you'll see the price creep up. I'd expect a nice electric oven to come up to £500 and your gas ovens might be around here too. Then, when you're looking at bigger, well-made ovens, you'll see these come into the realms of £1,000. I wouldn't recommend spending more than this unless you have borderline commercial needs.

Size and capacity: this will determine what you cook in your pizza oven, how many you can cater for, and where you can store it too. Most ovens can only take one pizza at a time, so if you know you want to cook more than one at once (very fancy) you'll want a Gozney Dome S1. the others might have quirks, such as chimneys, or heat sensitive bases that will affect where you put your pizza oven. These are all things you'll need to keep in mind when choosing.

Fuel type: most pizza ovens are single fuel, although some can cover multiple different options, but it’s good idea to gauge which you want. Electric pizza ovens are some of the most balcony friendly options and can often be used under cover. They’re reliable, perhaps not as authentic, but they get the job done on a very basic level. Next up, you have gas. This is still pretty easy to control, but you get the joys of a flame. This is a little more authentic and fun — you can play with holding food up to the flame — but gas can be expensive and a little ugly to store. The other classic fuel type is wood. This delivers an authentic, smoky flavour, but it’s a lot more high maintenance. You need a lot more time to heat the oven, you need ti tend to the fire, and it’s a lot less consistent. You also can’t use any old wood — it needs to be kiln dried. Some pizza ovens also take charcoal, which sits somewhere between gas and wood. It’s not really exciting and flavourful, nor is it as consistent as gas.

Special features: pizza ovens are generally really straight forward, but you'll get some nice extras in some models. That might be a rotating stone (handy if you've never cooked a pizza oven before), temperature gauge (really helpful for knowing when to cook), converter for different furl types, or, in the case of some electric models, you might get functions, such as air frying.

Included accessories: some air fryers come with their accessories included and others will require you to buy them separately. To get started, you really want a stand and a pizza peel, so check whether that's included in the price and then account for it depending on what you find. Then, you might be thinking about covers, pizza cutters, and other accessories. These are rarely included, but if you know you want them, it's worth looking out for a package deal, for example.

FAQs

What's better, Ooni or Ninja?

This will really depend on what you want from your pizza oven. I've just finished my tests of the Ninja Artisan Electric Pizza Oven and was really impressed both with the quality and versatility. If you want an oven that can air fry and bake, I'd go for the Ninja. Ooni, on the other hand, are more specialised, so they'll give you more nuanced, expertly tailored pizza ovens. The Volt, for example, works better both indoors and outdoors, whereas I wouldn't take the Ninja inside.

What's the best pizza oven for home?

This will depend on your skill. I love Gozney ovens, but they're more of an investment than a Ninja, for example. If you know you'll use yours a lot, go for a Gozney. They make commercial ovens (my family use them in the restaurant), so they know what good quality looks like). If this is the kind of thing you might buy and use a few times, go for a more entry-level friendly model, such as the Ninja, Tefal, or Woody instead.

What fuel type is best for a pizza oven?

The best fuel type for a pizza oven depends on the cooking style and flavour you’re after, but many pizza enthusiasts favuor wood as it imparts a traditional, smoky flavour and allows the oven to reach very high temperatures quickly. However, gas-fired ovens offer greater convenience, easier temperature control, and faster start-up times, making them a popular choice for home cooks. Some modern ovens are multi-fuel, allowing you to switch between wood, gas, or even charcoal for added versatility.

Personally, I always thought wood-fired was the way to go, because they're the ovens that I was raised on. However, at home, I really love gas. It's a lot easier, lower maintenance, and you still get great flavours.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/best-pizza-ovens/ pCPsUjpCMJoRdx9wMYsKmC Sun, 08 Jun 2025 10:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ How to clean the rubber seal on a washing machine, according to cleaning specialists ]]> Whether you've noticed some unwelcome buildup or have simply forgotten how to clean your washing machine's rubber seal, this guide is for you.

Sometimes we don't think about cleaning our washing machines until we're wondering why there's a strange smell coming from them. And even then, it can be a mystery as to where the smell is coming from and how you're supposed to get rid of it.

One of the most common culprits for collecting bacteria, dirt and detergent buildup is the rubber seal around the machine's door. Which is why it's incredibly important to know how to clean it and keep those smells and mould spores away from your lovely clean washing.

How to clean the rubber seal on a washing machine

Even when you do your best to avoid key things you shouldn't put in your washing machine, it can quickly start to smell and hold product buildup.

Smells and black stains are usually a sign that you need to clean your washing machine as soon as possible, but it's often too easy to forget the rubber seal where mould and mildew hide.

So, how can you properly clean your washing machine's rubber seal and guarantee you're removing all possible signs of mould?

picture of open and empty washing machine

(Image credit: Getty Images)

"It’s far easier than you think to clean your washing machine’s rubber seal properly. First gently pull your seal back to reveal any hidden gunk – here you’ll often find fluff, detergent scum and the odd rogue sock or coin," explains Katy Roberts, washing machine expert at AO.com.

"Wipe down any loose debris with kitchen roll or an old cloth before adding a cup of white vinegar and bicarbonate of soda paste to scrub away the excess. Scrub your seal carefully using an old cloth and get into all the folds where the grime hides," she adds.

All that's left to do then is rinse this solution out with clean water and make sure you wipe the seal dry thoroughly with a tea towel or a different cloth.

How often should you clean the rubber seal on a washing machine?

Although this task will need to be done regularly, it won't need to be added to your daily cleaning habits, especially if you're thoroughly cleaning it every time it's done.

"As a good rule of thumb, aim to clean the seal every one to two weeks, depending on how often you use your machine. If you're noticing odours or visible grime more frequently, step it up to a weekly clean," suggests Olivia Young, Product Development Specialist at Astonish.

She adds, "Regular maintenance is key to keeping both your washing machine and your laundry fresh."

How do you get black mould off a washing machine rubber seal?

To stop you from having to learn how to get rid of mould from fabric, it's a good idea to know how to tackle it in your machine first. As one of the unexpected places mould may be hiding in your home, the rubber seal is a magnet for moisture and consequently, mould spores.

"Black mould can be particularly stubborn, but it must be tackled to avoid any potential health concerns. The best way to tackle mould is to use a dedicated mould and mildew spray designed to remove mould with ease," recommends Olivia.

She explains that for the best results, you'll want to spray the solution and leave it for a few moments to work its magic, then wipe it away.

This HG Mould Spray, available on Amazon for £5.25, is a best seller and will eliminate any mould spots present on the seal without causing damage. Just make sure you wear gloves with this!

"Just be sure to spot-test it first and avoid prolonged contact with the rubber to prevent any potential wear. After using the spray, it's a good idea to run an empty hot cycle to rinse away any residue and keep your machine fresh," continues Olivia.

person cleaning mould of rubber seal of washing machine

(Image credit: Getty Images)

FAQs

What shouldn’t you do when cleaning a washing machine seal?

With all the possible appliance mistakes you need to avoid, it's good to know what you shouldn't do when tackling the cleaning. There are some products that the experts don't recommend and methods you're better off skipping.

"There are a couple of things you should certainly avoid using to clean your rubber seal. Don’t use anything too abrasive, like wire brushes or scouring pads, as these can easily damage the rubber and cause tears or leaks," warns Katy.

"Similarly, avoid using any strong chemical cleaners like bleach, as these can also degrade the material. Also, next time you’re cleaning your rubber seal, make sure you don’t close the door straight after cleaning. Moisture needs to fully dry out, or you can simply undo all your hard work," she finishes.

Olivia also points out that although the seal is made of rubber, you'll need to be gentle with it as too much pressure can tear or stretch the seal, which could lead to leaks.

What causes a washing machine door seal to go black?

There can be various reasons the seal in your machine has turned black or has started collecting black dirt inside it. It's nothing uncommon and can be cleaned using the methods above; however, it's a good idea to know what's causing it so you can prevent it.

"The black marks are typically mould or mildew, caused by a combination of trapped moisture, leftover detergent residue, and lint or debris. The seal’s folds are a prime spot for this to develop, especially if the machine door is kept shut between cycles," says Olivia.

She recommends always leaving the door ajar after washing and regularly wiping down the seal to prevent moisture from lingering.

Using a specialised cleaner regularly can also help your entire machine stay as clean as possible and ensure no black mould or mildew is building up in the seal and other spots.


Although it does look rather gross, keeping your washing machine rubber seal clean isn't about aesthetics. Oliva points out that regular cleaning can prolong the life of your machine whilst maintaining the hygiene of your clothes. It also helps make your home smell good as there's less lingering bacteria coming from your machine and into the air.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/how-to-clean-the-rubber-seal-on-a-washing-machine-expert-advice/ o6pLZx7C5PjUgiDo7ekT93 Sun, 08 Jun 2025 07:30:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ Can you cut overhanging branches from a neighbour's tree? Experts share legal rules and regulations ]]> We've probably all encountered the dilemma of an overgrown tree causing frustration. But many of us are still unsure whether you can freely cut the overhanging branches from a neighbour's tree, or if you need permission.

No matter what glorious garden trends lie on the other side of the fence, you might not always appreciate overhanging tree branches, particularly if the tree falls into the category of intrusive plants or those toxic to animals.

To understand how best to approach this issue, we've asked a range of legal experts and professional gardeners to outline the rules and share tips on how best to go about pruning the imposing branches.

Can you cut overhanging branches from a neighbour's tree?

If a neighbouring tree is overstepping the acceptable level of a privacy plant and encroaching on your garden, do you have the right to cut the branches back?

"If your neighbour’s tree is growing over the boundary into your garden, you are allowed to cut back any overhanging branches but only up to the boundary line," says Robert Dellow, a partner at the law firm Atkins Dellow LLP.

"You don’t need permission to do this, but you can’t go onto their land to carry it out, even if it seems like the quickest way to get it done," Robert stresses.

"It’s usually worth mentioning your plans beforehand just to keep things neighbourly. That conversation can help avoid misunderstandings and might even make things easier if their tree needs regular maintenance."

Garden fences with overgrowing trees to ask can you cut overhanging branches from a neighbour's tree

Overhanging branches from a neighbouring tree (Image credit: Future )

“Firstly, ensure the tree isn’t protected in any way," warns Dean Meadows, principal Arboriculturist and Tree Risk Management Lead at Arbtech.

"Trees in the UK may be covered by Tree Preservation Orders (TPOs), located within Conservation Areas, or subject to the Felling Licence system, all of which require you to seek permission before carrying out any work."

“If it’s not protected, you can prune branches up to the property boundary," Dean confirms. "Any further than this could be considered damage to your neighbour’s property, potentially leading to legal action."

So there you have it, you can cut overhanging branches from a neighbour's tree up to the boundary of your property. "This is classed as the right to abate a nuisance," says Graham Smith MCIHort, a horticultural expert from LBS Horticulture. "But you must not trespass onto your neighbour's property to cut the branches without their permission."

See our tips from a professional gardener below on cutting back overhanging branches properly.

Can a neighbour throw overhanging branches back?

This is the element many disagree on. The overhanging tree is the property of your neighbour, but if you choose to cut back the branches, are they then your responsibility to dispose of? Can you dispose of them over the fence? Or can the remnants go straight into your compost pile?

"Legally, the cuttings still belong to your neighbour, so you should offer them back rather than disposing of them straight away," advises Robert from a legal standpoint. "That doesn’t mean tossing them over the fence, though, because doing that without consent could cause more problems than it solves."

"Discarding them back over the fence could be regarded as fly-tipping of garden waste," says Dean.

So what should you do with the off-cuts? "Any removed branches should be offered back to your neighbour," advises Graham. "If the neighbour does not want the cuttings, you are responsible for their disposal."

Small garden with slated wooden fence with neighbour's trees overhanging

(Image credit: Future | Mark Bolton Photography)

Who pays to cut back overhanging trees?

If you are considering hiring a professional to cut back the overhanging tree, you might expect the neighbour to pay, given that it's legally their property. But that is not the case.

"You’ll need to cover the cost of any work, even though the tree belongs to your neighbour," Robert explains. "If you’re hiring a tree surgeon, that expense is yours unless your neighbour has agreed to split the bill or take responsibility in writing. It might feel unfair, but that’s how the law tends to see it. You're choosing to cut it back, so the cost is on you."

Dean adds: "In cases where the tree is causing damage due to your neighbour’s negligence, you may request that they cover the expenses. However, unless agreed otherwise, the cost of any work you commission typically falls on you.”

Expert tips for pruning an overhanging tree

I've recently encountered a friend who has had a bad experience with cutting back overhanging branches from a neighbour's tree, so I would advise being cautious with how much you cut.

We've asked professional gardener Orpheus Alexander to share his top tips on how to approach the pruning process, whether cutting back a magnolia tree or pruning a conifer.

"Once you’re all set and ready to go, be careful not to damage the tree, or you could be liable for any harm caused," he warns. "Not only are trees expensive to replace, but they are an important part of the local ecology, so we want to avoid having to replace them because of a clumsy cut. Poorly executed cuts can allow infection into the tree, and therefore, consideration is needed."

Here are Orpheus' three top tips:

  • Consider the timing: "For most trees, late autumn or winter is the best time to prune, when the tree is dormant. Cuts made in the growing season can weep sap and attract pests or disease."
  • Use the three-cut method: "When cutting a branch, always use the three-cut method - it stops the bark from tearing and helps the tree heal properly. Here’s how to do it: First, make a small cut on the underside of the branch, about 20–30cm out from where you want the final cut. Only cut up about a third of the branch. Then make a second cut from the top, a few inches further down the branch from your first undercut. Cut through here. Finally, if you can reach it, make a clean third cut just outside the branch collar (that’s the natural swollen join between trunk and branch. It’s where the tree seals itself off most effectively, reducing the risk of rot or disease). If you can’t reach that, then do a final clean cut where you would like the branch to end.
  • Call in a professional if needed: "If the branch is large, high up, or hanging over something like a shed or neighbour’s fence, don’t try to tackle it yourself. You could cause damage or harm. Call in a professional with the right gear."

Armed with all the correct information, you can now approach the task of pruning back the overhanging branches, safe in the knowledge that you are abiding by the correct garden etiquette. Having a polite conversation with your neighbour first will also ensure no bad feelings from the get-go.

If you have offered the branches back and your neighbour has said you can 'keep' them, you might want to check the guidelines on what garden waste you can burn in case the overcuts are not suitable.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/gardens/can-you-cut-overhanging-branches-neighbours-tree-advice/ buju2zpL8cqRXi54FDxATn Sun, 08 Jun 2025 05:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ These affordable pans are 9 times tougher than non-stick - I love them ]]>

At full price, this set is a steal. With £15 off, it's an absolute must have. If I didn't love it already, I really love it now.View Deal

Budget and beauty don’t often go hand in hand, so you can imagine my delight when Salter announced their Megastone collection. These pans, with their luxuriously textured surface, are not just beautifully designed — they’re better than non-stick, a joy to cook with, and built to stand the test of time.

I regularly test cookware as part of my role at woman&home, often using some of the best induction pans on the market. So when these arrived, I swapped out my Ninja ZeroStick Pan collection (a set that costs nearly five times the price) to see if Salter’s more affordable offering could hold its own.

Whether you're starting fresh in a new kitchen or simply after a pan that will both sizzle and sparkle on your hob, you're in the right place.

Specifications

Salter Megastone Frying Pan Set on the hob

(Image credit: Future)

Diameter options

20/24/28cm

Material

Forged aluminium

Hob compatability

All

Metal Utensil Safe

Yes

Non-stick

Yes

Dishwasher safe

No

Oven safe

No

Unboxing

Salter Megastone Frying Pan Set in packaging

(Image credit: Future)

The Salter Megastone Pan set comes with minimal packaging. From a set-up and a sustainability perspective, this is great news. Everything can go in the recycling bin and you won’t even need to pick up a pair of scissors to get cooking on these. My one word of advice would be to rinse out the pans, as they are very open and factory dust or dirt might have settled inside them in transit.

Who would it suit?

Raw pancake mix in the Salter Megastone Frying Pan Set

(Image credit: Future)

The Megastone collection has far-reaching appeal. Not only is it a brilliant price point, the PFOAS-free coating can replace your traditional non-stick pans, but with the promise that they won’t scratch if you use metal utensils because they are nine times tougher.

They make a great first set of pans too, or a collection to buy for less confident cooks, because there is a neat line on the handle that will glow red when the pans are enough to cook on.

Aside from the fact that they aren’t dishwasher safe, these are the pans you could use for everything and anything. Salter sells them in a whole host of different combinations, but this one is perfect for covering all the basics. It’s a great starter set.

What is it like to use?

Salter Megastone Frying Pan Set cooking on the hob

(Image credit: Future)

The three different frying pan sizes offer you versatility. You could squeeze three American pancakes into the 28cm frying pan, or one large pancake in the 20cm pan. Whilst I would happily just cook and test pancakes all day, I have a set series of tests that I put all our frying pans through. I think you'll like what you hear.

Pancake on the Salter Megastone Frying Pan Set

(Image credit: Future)

For my first test, I put my induction hob into its top power setting. Within thirty seconds, the handle had changed colour. I splashed water in the base and little beads of water sizzled and danced around, demonstrating that this was up to temperature.

I carried out a few tests in each frying pan: a classic pancake to see how evenly heat transferred across the base. You can see this on the colouring on each pancake, which makes for a really simple test. I start off all the pancake tests by melting a knob of butter. However, I quickly found that the butter usually reserved for making my pancake flippable wasn’t needed.

It moved almost too much around the pan, so I swapped it out for a very light coating — to help the pancake brown. To my delight, the pancake really evenly browned on both sides and the feel of the pan made it easy to flip and shuffle around.

Frying onions in the Salter Megastone Frying Pan Set

(Image credit: Future)

The onions make for a similar success story: they cooked evenly and quickly, with some nice colour. It was lovely not to worry about the utensils that I was using too, as I was cooking the onions for burgers and wanted to use my metal tongs.

Chocolate sauce being made in the Salter Megastone Frying Pan Set

(Image credit: Future)

The final test that I did was making a chocolate sauce. This needs a low and slow heat so that the chocolate doesn't burn and cease. You can see that the pan transferred heat really gently across the base, melting my chocolate with the delicate touch that I would expect from pans at least ten times the price.

Cleaning

Salter Megastone Frying Pan Set being washed up

(Image credit: Future)

This is the only downside of the pans and, actually, it doesn’t make much difference to me. You can only hand wash them, which I think should be best practice anyway. Your pans last a lot longer and they get put through a lot less when they are washed by hand, but for those times when you don’t have the energy, it’s nice to have the fallback of pans that can go in. Either way, the non-stick is so good on these that I couldn’t actually burn anything to the base of them. Believe me, I tried. This made cleaning really really easy, because everything washed off under water. So, these make up for any compromises.

How does it compare?

Pale American pancakes in the Ninja NeverStick Pan Set

(Image credit: Future)

I mentioned right at the beginning of this review that the Salter pans took the place of my Ninja NeverStick for the week that I was testing. They’re really similar — and not just because of the stone-effect non-stick. Both pan sets were nice to handle, lightweight, and quick to transfer heat. Ninja had a few extra touches, including the stackable set and neat lip around the edge, but they are only slight touches that I think will only make the difference for really serious chefs. The Salter makes a great option for those after Ninja pans, but who want to save some money.

Should you buy it?

Boiling water in the Salter Megastone Frying Pan Set

(Image credit: Future)

As a stylish set, the Salter Megastone collection are unrivalled. They look beautiful, they’re nice to handle, and I cooked up a whole host of delicious dishes in them. So, if you’re shopping on a budget, here’s somewhere you won’t need to compromise.

How we test

Base of the Salter Megastone Frying Pan Set

(Image credit: Future)

At woman&home, all the pans that we test go through a standardise series of tasks that are designed to test their versatility, usability, and quality. I keep these identical so that I can compare between other pans that you might be eye-ing up as well as for the sake of context.

You’ll see that I test fast and slow cooking, all the while, thinking about how they feel to handle. If you have questions about them after you’ve read my review, don’t hesitate to reach out and ask me a question. My inbox is always open.

You can read more on our dedicated page for how we test pans.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/salter-megastone-thermo-collar-3-piece-frying-pan-set-review/ QhC2KGtpayPDfw5wkE5zhf Sat, 07 Jun 2025 10:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ The MADE X Harlequin collection has it all, from contemporary design to loungable comfort ]]> Sometimes our homes need a little refresh, and this can be done in several ways with varying budgets. However, when you've got the option to splurge, there's nothing better than transforming your living space with some new, exciting furniture.

Whether you keep up with the sofa trends or have been looking at ways to transform your living room, statement furniture is where it's at this year. And what better proof of this than a new seating collection from online furniture company MADE?

Partnering with contemporary design house Harlequin, MADE has created trending yet timeless made-to-order sofa designs that will have you ready to invest.

The MADE X Harlequin collection

The collection, all available to order now at Next.co.uk, is designed with confidence, colour and unapologetic style in mind.

It features everything we love about the dopamine decor trend, but with a more modern, sophisticated finish.

The brand-new upholstery collection from MADE and Harlequin consists of six statement designs, crafted in collaboration between the brands.

Each fabric is made to elevate your space and spark some conversation from your guests. No minimaluxe decor designs here.

picture of Avalon sofa in living room

(Image credit: MADE)

While the fabric designs are brand new, the styles of sofa are made up of three of MADE's iconic, design-led shapes.

And it's not just sofas that are on offer; if you've wanted to dabble with the current armchair trends, there are options for smaller seating too.

Not only does the collection showcase some of the most popular furniture trends we're seeing this year, but some of the biggest interior colour trends too. From rich terracotta oranges to vibrant shades of Matcha green, there's something for every home.

picture of checkered armchair

(Image credit: MADE)

With prices starting at £450 for the matching footstools and going upwards of £1,699 for the large sofas, this furniture is a long-term investment with each piece made to last.

The fabrics, dependent on design, are made up of predominantly cotton or linen with added polyester for a soft yet hard-wearing finish. Perfect if you have a busy household and you're constantly wondering how to clean your living room as quickly as possible.

So, if you're ready to invest in some 'compliment-magnet' furniture, what better excuse than the launch of this polished yet vibrant collection?

Shop the collection


Reinventing a space can be hard work, but it doesn't always need to be expensive. If you're looking to freshen up your living room, why not start with decluttering it? Reducing the clutter can make a huge difference in both the way you feel about the space and how it looks.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/homes-news/made-x-harlequin-furniture-collection-launch-at-next/ FqPk72HGwPqxA93mWLnDHc Sat, 07 Jun 2025 08:30:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ How to care for an olive tree: a comprehensive guide to keep your Mediterranean plant happy ]]> If you want a plant that is going to elevate the look of your space while also providing you with some delicious fruit, then olive trees are an excellent choice. And, to keep the plant happy and the olive supply high, you'll want to follow this expert guide on essential maintenance.

Olive trees are one of the best trees for pots and can be a great addition to your indoor and outdoor plant collection. They're a fantastic way of bringing much-loved Mediterranean garden ideas to life.

Olive trees are surprisingly easy to care for, so it's no real surprise they're becoming an increasingly popular garden trend. However, it's important to know all you can about keeping them happy and healthy, which is why we asked horticulture experts for their no-nonsense care guide.

How to care for an olive tree: an expert guide

Whether you're trying out a new garden theme or simply want to learn how to care for your olive tree properly, we asked the experts for their advice on each step.

Shop plant care essentials

Get the watering schedule right

picture of person watering olive tree

(Image credit: Getty Images)

Learning how to water your garden plants properly is an easy way of creating a happy and thriving garden with long-term growth.

"Olive trees that are newly planted need to be watered deeply 2-3 times a week during the spring and summer, ideally with a soaker hose or drip irrigation. It's fine to water established trees 5-7 years old every few weeks, letting the soil dry between waterings," explains Jane Dobbs, Lead Gardener at Allan's Gardeners.

She points out that you'll need to reduce this watering during autumn and winter. "Only supplement with water if there's not enough rain. Don't water potted trees until the soil is dry. You should water deeply, saturating the soil until it drains from the bottom," adds Jane.

Establish a healthy soil mix

If you've planted your olive tree in the ground, you'll want to make sure you've got the right soil type. On the other hand, if it's being kept in a pot there are specific soil mixes you need to use, like the one linked above.

"Olive trees need a well-draining soil because they hate having wet roots. The ideal mix for them is a sandy or loamy soil with good drainage. If you're planting them in clay soil, amend it with grit, sand or perlite to improve the aeration. The pH range should be neutral to slightly alkaline, around 6.5 to 8.5," recommends Petar Ivanov, gardening expert at Fantastic Gardeners.

Maintain a feeding routine

picture of fertiliser on a spade

(Image credit: Getty Images)

Forgetting to feed your plants isn't just a common houseplant mistake; it's also easily done with outdoor species, too. The soil in UK gardens won't always be able to provide more exotic plants with what they need year-round, so it's important to know when to feed them and what with.

Jane says, "You can apply a balanced, slow-release fertiliser in early spring and again in mid-summer. Blend guano, seaweed, and Epsom salts with a slow-release fertiliser high in potassium, phosphate, and magnesium."

Stay on top of pruning

Knowing how to prune your olive tree will help with its growth, fruit production and keeping its overall shape intact.

"You need to make sure to prune an olive tree annually in late winter or early spring to maintain its shape and remove any dead or crossing branches," advises Luke Dejahang, garden expert and CEO of Crown Pavillions.

It's important to remove diseased branches or leaves, too, before the issue can become any worse and lead to your plant's health deteriorating.

Balance the light exposure

picture of olive tree with sunlight hitting it

(Image credit: Getty Images)

Olive trees are native plants from the Mediterranean, so it's no surprise they like their fair share of sun and warmth.

"Sunlight is critical for olive trees. They need full sun, at least 6 hours a day, preferably 8 or more. The best positioning for an olive tree is in the open, unobstructed by buildings or large trees. Somewhere south-facing in the Northern Hemisphere will be ideal," says Petar.

This is not a plant that likes shade, it can tolerate some afternoon shade but it's key to place it in your garden where it'll get the most sun.

"If you're growing it in a pot indoors or on a patio, place the tree near a south-facing window or use grow lights during darker months," Petar adds.

Tend to potting and repotting needs

Although you won't need to do it too often, knowing how to repot your plant is key to ensuring its long-term growth and health. Keeping a plant in a small pot for too long can stunt its growth and cause it to eventually die.

"Terracotta pots with drainage holes are ideal for potting. A gravel or crock can be added to the bottom of the container to improve drainage," advises Jane.

She adds, "Whenever a tree outgrows its pot, move it to a larger container. Ideally, repotting should be done in the spring and do not use plastic pots since they retain moisture."

FAQs

Where to grow an olive tree?

As both a great plant for the garden and one of the best indoor plants, you have some choice about where you want your olive tree to live.

"For outdoor growing, you'll need to be in a region that has mild winters, and the tree will need to be sheltered. If grown indoors, it can be planted in containers. A bright, sunny window is ideal, and the tree should be rotated regularly to ensure even growth," recommends Jane.

Should you live in more northern areas of the UK, you might struggle to keep an olive tree happy, especially through particularly cold and wet winters. Although you can learn to overwinter your olive tree which will give them a better chance of surviving through drops in temperature.

How do I keep my olive tree happy?

picture of a potted olive tree in kitchen

(Image credit: Getty Images)

Should you be the sort of plant parent who prefers having the easiest plants to keep alive, then you'll be glad to know that keeping an olive plant happy is pretty straightforward.

"Make sure that it gets plenty of sunlight and avoid overwatering because olive trees prefer dry conditions and dislike soggy roots. They also thrive in low humidity, so there is no need to mist them," advises Luke.

"Moreover, good airflow helps prevent pests and fungal issues, and if your tree is in a container, make sure it has proper drainage. Feeding during the growing season and avoiding sudden environmental changes will also help keep your tree healthy and vibrant," he continues.

Why is my potted olive tree dying?

Have you noticed that your plant has seen better days? There are a few things that could be affecting its health, and ways you can fix them.

"If your potted olive tree is struggling or appears to be dying, there are a few common culprits to consider. Overwatering is one of the most, if not the most, frequent problems, especially if the pot lacks drainage," says Luke.

Other possible stresses include poor light, nutrient deficiencies or sudden temperature changes. Luke also recommends checking the roots; if they're brown and mushy, that's an obvious sign your plant has root rot.

"On the other hand, if the soil is bone dry and the leaves are crispy, it may be underwatered. Pests like scale or spider mites can also cause decline, so make sure to check the leaves and stems closely," he adds.

How to tell if an olive tree needs water?

As with any plant watering routine, it can be hard to know when the perfect time to stop watering or water more is. There are, however, tell-tale signs that your plant needs watering that you can keep an eye out for.

"All you need to do to see if an olive tree needs water is to simply check the soil. Stick your finger about 2-3 inches into the soil, and if it's dry, it is time to water your olive tree. The leaves may also look slightly dull or droopy when the tree is thirsty, so keep an eye on it," says Luke.


Should you be particularly worried about caring for your olive tree, it can be a good idea to keep a keen eye on it. Whilst you're completing your daily cleaning habits why not give your plant a check over, that way you'll never miss a watering session.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/how-to-care-for-an-olive-tree-an-expert-guide/ GpxJJWTGLS2gL7VAznH2nj Sat, 07 Jun 2025 05:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ Cleaning expert reveals shocking reason your pillow needs cleaning more often than you think ]]> You might run a tight ship when it comes to cleaning your bedding regularly, but are you cleaning your pillows enough? The weight of them might just prove you're not.

Aside from how often you should wash your sheets and clean your mattress protector, did you know your pillows could be the worst culprit for hidden germs and dirt buildup?

Talking on This Morning, 'Queen of Clean' Lynsey Crombie revealed that half of your pillow's weight is actually made up of dead skin cells. Shudder.

Reason your pillow needs cleaning more often: expert reveals all

The reel posted by This Morning on Instagram (@thismorning) shocked users as presenter Ben Sheppared reveals, "Here’s a horrifying, truly horrifying fact for you, half of the weight of the average person’s pillow is actually made up of dead skin cells."

So, unless you've been cleaning your house like a professional every month, the chances are your pillow is a little heavier than when you first started sleeping on it.

"I did put this to the test a few years ago," starts cleaning expert Lynsey. "So when I first heard that, I just got a standard pillow, so if you buy one new, just weigh it on your kitchen scales and then give it six months, and just look at the difference."

That's right, even the best pillows on the market will get heavier with use thanks to the bodily fluids we tend to lose when sleeping.

"So I always think, when you cook pasta at home and the pasta shells hit the water, they expand and weigh more, don’t they? It’s the same with the pillow, it is because of your bodily fluids from your head, saliva, and eyes. I mean, this is pretty disgusting," explains Lynsey.

Now you've been traumatised, you're probably wondering how you can fix this or avoid it happening completely. Well, Lynsey recommends investing in some thick, top-quality pillow protectors that will act as a barrier to these damaging fluids.

You can clean the protectors very easily every time you wash your sheets, and this will stop or slow down the process of your pillow collecting those nasty particles. If you struggle with allergies, you can pick up some hypoallergenic protectors that will keep dust, dander and pollen at bay.

How often should you clean your pillows?

picture of two pillows drying on an airer

(Image credit: Getty Images)

Although you might be wondering how often you should change your pillows after this frightening discovery, simply cleaning them can stop this buildup from happening.

Catherine Green, sustainable cleaning expert at Smol, says, "Most pillowcases can go in your wash every week or so with the other parts of your bedding, but the part that’s often forgotten about is the actual pillows underneath, which should be cleaned every 4-6 months. Why? Because they quietly collect all sorts of hidden grime from dead skin cells to dust mites, even if they look clean."

"The material also affects how often you should be putting them through a wash! Foam, gel and hypoallergenic pillows generally hold up better against dirt and dust mites, while wool and feather ones may need a little more care. As always, check the care label before anything else, as this will contain the most detailed information relevant to your pillows," she adds.

Regular cleaning will also help you remove any yellow stains from your pillows or prevent them from appearing altogether.

How do you deep clean a pillow?

So, how can you wash your pillow properly at home and guarantee a thorough, hygienic clean? Well, that depends on what type of pillows you have.

"Pillows can be made from a variety of different materials, so you must always start with the care label; it’ll tell you if your pillow’s safe for the washing machine or if it needs a gentler approach," explains Catherine.

For foam pillows, she recommends starting with a mixture of warm water and a squirt of washing-up liquid. Then use a soft cloth to gently sponge the surface, after that rinse with clean water and allow to air dry completely before putting it back on your bed.

If you have polyester or down pillows, you can use your washing machine. Catherine advises, "Drop a laundry capsule into the back of an empty washing machine drum, then add your pillows. Ideally, in pairs to balance the load. Choose a cool wash with a standard spin and then let them air dry fully; some can be tumble-dried, but double-check the label first."


Catherine shares a daily habit to keep your bed feeling extra fresh. She says, "I recommend pulling back the covers each morning to let your bed breathe. It’s a tiny habit that can help cut down on things like moisture and allergens."

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/homes-news/cleaning-expert-reveals-reason-you-should-clean-pillows-more-often/ jquWvhXdvmQAAZER2pTLXe Thu, 05 Jun 2025 05:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ Prepare for summer heat with Aldi's air cooler – 60% cheaper than Amazon's Choice cooler ]]> If you're looking to keep cool this summer, we recommend popping to Aldi to pick up the incredibly affordable air cooler. It arrives in the middle aisle from this Thursday, 5th June, priced at just £39.99.

When striving to keep a room cool without AC, you can't beat a fan or a portable air cooler to provide instant relief with an icy cool breeze. Most air cooler models are expensive, but of course, that's not the case with Aldi's new must-have appliance.

When comparing the highly affordable Aldi Air Cooler to a best-selling model on Amazon (by a well-known brand), the supermarket buy wins on capacity, timer and portability thanks to its carry handles. And that's without mentioning the £90 saving thanks to the Aldi price tag.

New in this week: Aldi Air Cooler

The sizeable Aldi air cooler unit is more than capable of catering to most family-sized rooms, suitable for rooms up to 10 m² (approx). The Ambiano model

"If you're looking to stay cool without splashing out on air conditioning, an air cooler like Aldi’s is a savvy seasonal buy," says w&h's home ecommerce editor, Laura Honey.

"Look for features like a large water tank (between 5 and 6 litres is a good size), automatic swing function (also called oscillation), and multiple speed settings – all of which help circulate cool air more effectively."

"Portable options with wheels and a timer are also great for moving between rooms and keeping energy use in check," says Laura.

And, if you’re quick on the Specialbuys, you might even get your hands on their extra portable small unit, which is perfect for bedrooms and smaller spaces. The smaller air cooler is only £14.99, arriving in the middle aisle this week too.

It's also worth looking out for the Aldi Bladeless Fan in stores this week.

This mini portable air cooling device is ideal for moving around the home from room to room to ensure every space you're in is instantly cooled.

The removable water tank and washable filter allow for easy cleaning, easier than cleaning a fan. The washable components ensure cleaner air quality.

The compact design features LED motion lights with 7 different colour options: dark blue, orange, pink, green, red, sky blue, and purple. Fun and functional. Although the changeable light function can be switched off for those who prefer the appliance to go unnoticed while it keeps your room cool.


If you also struggle to sleep in the heat, it's worth using the larger air conditioner to keep the bedroom cool during the day because no matter what air cooling unit you choose, it might not be all that pleasant to listen to while you try to drift off. Although there are several alternative ways to keep a bed cool in hot weather, none of which require the need for AC.

Remember, as with all Specialbuys, once they're gone, they're gone. So if you wish to pick up one of these brilliantly affordable cooling solutions, you'd best be quick. Both are in supermarkets from Thursday, 5th June, but only while stocks last.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/homes-news/aldi-air-cooler-ambiano/ pQxWsGqGkjREZiN29X8r9g Wed, 04 Jun 2025 05:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ I’m collecting these heirloom pans one at a time — they’re the best I’ve ever used ]]> I trust Miele with a lot of tasks in my kitchen — my oven, my fridge, my freezer, my hob — so when they launched a collection of stainless steel pans, it was inevitable that they would end up in my kitchen.

Having tested some of the best induction pans and stainless steel pans on the market, I’ve ended up with pretty high standards, but Miele’s cooks up quite the selection.

Substantial without being weighty, designed to absolute perfection, I have started setting aside funds to kit out my kitchen with these heirloom-worthy pans.

The Miele Stainless Steel Pan SetSpecifications

Testing the Miele Stainless Steel Pan

(Image credit: Future)

RRP

£599

Material

Stainless steel, KMDA optimised lid

Included

28cm frying pan, 1.5L saucepan, 1.5L casserole, 4L casserole

Compatible with

All hobs and cookers

Warranty

2 years

Unboxing the Miele Stainless Steel Pan Set

Testing the Miele Stainless Steel Pan

(Image credit: Future)

As expected, the packaging for Miele’s Stainless Steel Pans is impeccable. The robust cardboard box is a relative Russian doll of smaller cardboard boxes, each containing different pans to form the complete set. They’re mostly protected by cardboard, which gets a big tick in my sustainability box, except for the frying pan, which has some soft plastic wrapped around it, but it meant that the pan arrived scratch-free, so I can’t complain.

I gave all the pans a precautionary rinse before using them. Miele recommends it because there might be some factory dust that settles inside them somewhere along the line. They dry and clean really easily. I instantly got a good feeling about these Miele pans.

Who would the Miele Stainless Steel Pan Set suit?

Testing the Miele Stainless Steel Pan

(Image credit: Future)

Thoughtfully designed, robust pans suit a lot of people, so one of the key deciders will be price. You can invest in the set together, or buy them individually, which is what I will do because I can’t drop £125 per pan at once. If you want quality pans that will last for a lifetime, these are a brilliant investment. I have no doubt that you’ll be handing them down through generations.

All of the pans are stainless steel, which makes them compatible for all hob types and, importantly keeps them free from any of the chemicals that have had a lot of bad press in the last few years.

There are other nice touches that will suit very specific people. For example, the lid has a mini lip for drainage — very helpful. And the lids are all clear, so you can keep an eye on what’s cooking inside without letting all of the steam out. They’re very easy to love.

What is the Miele Stainless Steel Pan Set like to use?

Testing the Miele Stainless Steel Pan

(Image credit: Future)

All of the handles are nice and roomy, I could get a hand through them with an oven glove on, which is nice. They also didn’t get hot, even after long periods of boiling and frying and the lids stacked neatly on top of the pans. There are also small gaps in the lids for draining the water. See what I mean? They are a great set that have clearly been designed by people who use them a lot.

I tested all the pans in the set to check that they all covered my pre-set tasks well. Here are the results.

Test 1: frying pan

Testing the Miele Stainless Steel Pan

(Image credit: Future)

These are often sold separately, so to have the Miele frying pan in with all of the others suggests to me that Miele think a lot of it. I have a few tests that I run through on frying pans: splashing water for a heat test, frying onions for speed, cooking pancakes for even heat coverage, and making a chocolate sauce for a test of low and slower cooking.

Testing the Miele Stainless Steel Pan

(Image credit: Future)

The Miele frying pan made droplets of water dance around the pan in actual seconds. I couldn’t even start the timer to check it. The fried onions were soft and tender in two minutes, which is also an impressive result. So it’s all really down to the pancake test to see how perfect this pan is.

Some non-stick pans can make pancakes look perfect without butter, but this definitely needed some greasing. With a light smear, I got a really nice, even colour across my pancake. It took 30 seconds longer than my other pans, which I was surprised at because this was spot on for onions and very quick for my water droplet test, but the end results were good. I can’t argue with a tasty pancake.

Test 2: saucepans and stock pots

Testing the Miele Stainless Steel Pan

(Image credit: Future)

This test covers the same points as the frying pan. I boil a litre of water in the pans, cook potatoes, make soup, stews, and generally use them in my kitchen for a week.

The first test that I ran was boiling water in the main saucepan. It took just over two minutes to boil 1 litre of water on my top heat, which is actually really quick, even though it doesn’t sound it. I could see steam and bubbles in the water almost instantly, which suggests that these pans don’t mess around when it comes to heat. Then, the lid kept the heat in right up to the boiling point.

Testing the Miele Stainless Steel Pan

(Image credit: Future)

I used the stainless steel milk pan to make porridge, as well as warming up milk and single portions of soup. The handle is really nice to hold, it doesn't get hot, and my porridge didn't get stuck on any of the edges of the pan either. It's a really great little one to have. When I start collecting the set, this will be the first one that I buy.

Testing the Miele Stainless Steel Pan

(Image credit: Future)

The clear lids came in really handy for boiling potatoes and when I wanted to warm up soup. This took just over a minute and they were generally brilliant at speedily and evenly warming all the dishes I threw at them over the month that I used these.

All of the pans have fluid measurements engraved on the side, which makes pastas and broths and stews really simple, because you can fill them up from the tap.

Cleaning the Miele Stainless Steel Pan Set

Testing the Miele Stainless Steel Pan

(Image credit: Future)

Time in my kitchen is never without a little burning and mess, so I got a good test of what these are like to clean. In theory, they’re all dishwasher safe, so if you like to keep clear of the sink, you can. I plan on keeping these pans for life, so hand washed them, which is really easy. There aren’t any books where food gets stuck and even the remnants of my burnt pancake didn’t stick around on the pan for long. There is a perfect way to clean stainless steel, which you can read about here if you want.

How does the Miele Stainless Steel Pan Set compare?

The full Made In 10-piece Stainless Steel Pan Set on my counter

(Image credit: Future)

These aren’t the most expensive pans I’ve ever tested (those are from Made In and they are fabulous) and yet the Miele Stainless Steel Set are contains some of my favourites. They’re really nice to use, a wonderful build quality, and I am relieved that they’re sold separately, because it means I can save up for each one.

The Miele collection remind me a lot of the Zwilling set. The only difference is that Zwilling has a few more size offerings and the handles are a little smaller. If you want really lightweight pans, you might be better with Miele, or even M&S’ pan set, but if you’re saving money and looking for diversity, Zwilling makes a great alternative.

Should you buy the Miele Stainless Steel Pan Set?

Testing the Miele Stainless Steel Pan

(Image credit: Future)

If, like me, you want quality in your kitchen, I can’t fault these. They’re neatly designed, well-made, and a true delight to use. I’m just buying them one by one to save some money.

How we test

Testing the Miele Stainless Steel Pan

(Image credit: Future)

When you read a review of stainless steel pans at woman&home you're getting a great insight into everything that goes on behind the scenes when we are choosing the products that we recommend to you. Our pans have tests on speed, heat transfer, style, and cleaning. I also look at value and I compare them to other sets on the market. By the end of a review, you should know everything you need to before making a purchase. If you want to find out more, you can visit our page for how we test stainless steel pans.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/miele-stainless-steel-pan-set-review/ za2PaWtyf6sjxcR89fRirA Mon, 02 Jun 2025 05:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ The secret I can't keep this summer? Ninja's new pizza oven - it's patio-friendly perfection ]]> You probably know Ninja best for their air fryer prowess — and yes, that overlaps a little with pizza. So it won't come as a huge surprise when that they are staking their claim as pizza professionals with the launch of their latest innovation: the Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven .

If spinning pizzas in a traditional oven feels daunting, or if gas and wood-fired setups just aren’t an option, this electric oven is the next best thing, possibly even better.

Fully electric and perfect for patios or balconies, it’s seriously impressed me. In fact, I’ve made some of the best pizzas of my life in this oven — and trust me, I’m still surprised by that. Could this be one of the best pizza ovens of all time?

Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven: Specifications

Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven and Air Fryer on the deck

(Image credit: Future)

RRP

£299.99

Dimensions

H32 x W42 x D59cm

Weight

11.9 kgs

Settings

Pizza, prove, bake, air fry

Power

2400 watts

Cable length

1.5m

Unboxing the Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven

Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven and Air Fryer box

(Image credit: Future)

Whilst the box for the Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven is big and heavy, once you’ve got it where you want it, setting up the pizza oven is easy.

Inside the top of the box you have your pizza peel and cooking stone, alongside a handy recipe book. Then, the next layer down, you have your pizza oven. Inside the oven, you have your tray and air fryer basket, and that’s it. Everything is neat, easy to store, and there’s no faff getting ready. I don’t know why I’m surprised, this is Ninja that we’re talking about.

Once you're all set up, all the packaging can be recycled — another big win, especially for pizza ovens — and the pizza oven has its own stand, so you can put it on a table, as long as you are near a plug.

Who would the Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven suit?

Pizza coming out of Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven and Air Fryer

(Image credit: Future)

The Ninja Artisan Electric Pizza Oven is perfect for anyone who loves homemade pizza but wants a fuss-free, electric alternative to traditional wood-fired or gas ovens. It’s ideal for beginners who want consistent, high-heat results without the learning curve of managing flames, as well as experienced home cooks who want to experiment with different pizza styles—from Neapolitan to deep dish.

Its compact, counter-friendly design also makes it a great fit for people with limited outdoor space, such as those with patios or balconies. If you value convenience, versatility, and excellent results without the need for specialist skills or fuel, this oven is made for you.

Even as an electric sceptic, I think I've been converted to cooking pizzas in Ninja style. If you think it might suit you too, just wait to see what I cooked in here.

What is the Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven like to use?

Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven and Air Fryer controls

(Image credit: Future)

Ninja recommends running a test that the plug and socket is okay before turning the oven on from the switch at the back. It's a matter of plugging in and pressing a button, but it's a safety matter, so don't skip it.

You’ll see a menu of different options at the front, demonstrating that you can bake, prove, air fry, and make pizza in the oven. I started with the pizza setting and it only needed 15 minutes before the Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven chimed to let me know that it had reached temperature. That’s the speediest heat up I’ve had with a pizza oven.

Test 1: pizza

Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven and Air Fryer viewing window

(Image credit: Future)

Now, as a traditionalist, I was a little hesitant that an electric oven could even come close to cooking the quality of pizza that a gas or wood oven could. However, I will publicly eat my words (and a lot of pizza too) because this cooked some of the best pizzas I’ve ever made at home.

In just three minutes, my base puffed up. It was crispy in the bottom and really evenly cooked, the cheese was melted perfectly on top, and my crusts were still soft in the middle. I threw all sorts of combinations of toppings at the Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven and it kept serving up consistently impressive pizzas.

Pizza cooked in the Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven and Air Fryer

(Image credit: Future)

The oven was nice and wide, easy to slide 12 inch pizzas in and out from, and the timer meant none of them burnt. You also have the authentic combination of a nice pizza stone and 350 degree heat that culminates in some impressive results. It’s a really manageable way to cook pizza if you’ve never had an outdoor oven before end the beauty of it is that it’s balcony and apartment friendly.

Test 2: grilled vegetables

Vegetables cooked in the Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven and Air Fryer

(Image credit: Future)

Pizza isn’t the only food on the menu with Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven, so I naturally had to run some more tests. If you’ve ever wondered about using your air fryer outside, Ninja has done it. This means that if you want to have chips while you barbecue, you can. If you want to add some crispy chicken nuggets or fish fingers, you can. In my case, I wanted to test out cooking some Mediterranean vegetables.

The Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven operates its air frying function at 190 degrees, which is a reasonable temperature. I left my vegetables in for 20 minutes and, whilst they cooked nicely, I’ve certainly had better results from other Ninja air fryers.

They lacked the crisp and charring that other pizza ovens that use flames deliver. I put some chips in and had really similar results — they were cooked, but just a little soft. As far as outdoor air fryers go, this is the best. However, if you’re after a genuinely good air fryer, stay inside and invest in a different model from Ninja.

Test 3: nachos

Nachos in the Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven and Air Fryer

(Image credit: Future)

My next test was nachos. I wasn’t sure whether to go for the pizza or air fryer oven, but I had just been working with pizzas, so I thought I would keep things easy. What you see in the picture above is the result of two minutes in the Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven.

My tortilla chips toasted — if not a little too much — my cheese melted and it was all done really speedily. Next time, I would be tempted to go for a tower temperature to avoid burning the tortilla chips, but that’s all part of the learning curve.

Test 4: cookies

Cookies in the Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven and Air Fryer

(Image credit: Future)

There’s a baking function on the Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven and I have a sweet tooth. It’s a dangerous combination really. Having used this a few times for different sweet treats, I can confidently say that you could make cakes, brownies, cookies, focaccia, and really any baked treat you fancy in here. My focaccia was brilliant, because I could use the prove function — which runs at 30°C — in between kneading and cooking. It cooked beautifully, smelled delicious, and was actually so good, that the testing team and I ate it before I took a picture. Sorry.

The one baked treat that I managed to remember to capture on camera was my tray of cookies. These were brown and cooked right through in eight minutes, which is quicker than a conventional oven, but slower than a pizza oven. You can see that they were really evenly cooked and they tasted as good as they looked (10/10), so I was suitably pleased.

Cleaning the Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven

Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven and Air Fryer pizza stone

(Image credit: Future)

The temptation with pizza ovens is always to want to scrub the stone clean. The harsh truth is that it will never look as good as when you first bought it and that cleaning it is actually not great for the stone.

Ninja gives you this same reality on the outside of the stone, requesting that you don’t submerge it in water, because the porous stone will absorb the water and its hard to get the oven running at its best again. I like to think of the marks as badges of honour anyway. It’s a sign that you’ve used your pizza oven well.

How does the Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven compare?

Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven and Air Fryer pizza stone

(Image credit: Future)

If you pitch the Ninja against other electric pizza ovens, you’re wasting time. The Ninja is by far the best I’ve ever used. This means that you end up comparing the Ninja to gas, wood, and charcoal ovens. If you’re looking at an electric oven, I’m guessing you’re more likely to be comfortable using gas than you are using wood, which means you should probably consider either the Woody Pizza Oven or the Morsø Forno Spin.

The Woody is cheaper than the Ninja and works on gas, wood, or charcoal. It has the pizza oven look and still covers a great range of different functions. The Ninja is definitely more hands-off and requires a lot less skill to make a good pizza, but you might get more satisfaction from the Woody.

The Morsø Forno Spin, on the other hand, costs another £200, but it’s worth every penny. This is gas-powered but has a plate inside that automatically rotates your pizza. It’s attractive, easy to use, and really good quality. I much prefer the feel and look of it in comparison to the Ninja, but, again, it’s not quite as hands-off.

Should you buy the Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven?

Air fryer function in the Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven and Air Fryer

(Image credit: Future)

If you want a pizza oven that you can press a button and leave, this is perfect. It surprised me with the quality of pizzas that this churned out and I’m pleased to say that it’s balcony friendly, which makes a nice change from the rest of the market. True to Ninja form, this is an impressive oven.

How we test

Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven and Air Fryer oven mouth

(Image credit: Future)

It's not a hard life testing pizza ovens. I’ve been cooking in them for over a decade, so am leading the charge on how we review them at woman&home. Our process is designed to cover all eventualities: I look at packaging and delivery, accessories, and build quality, as well as what the pizza oven is like to clean and any maintenance that needs to be carried out on it.

The tests that you’ll read about have all been carefully selected to test the versatility and quality of every pizza oven’s performance. Pizzas are a classic, but testing roasted vegetables is a great way to look at longer cooking tasks, just as nachos test the speed and efficiency of an oven.

Having tested all of the pizza ovens myself, I know how they compare to each other, so I can hand-pick the perfect one for you as well as comparing it to something similar that I think you’ll like. My reviews should give you a really clear idea of what a pizza oven is like to use, but if you still have questions, feel free to email me, or do a deep dive into my article on how we test pizza ovens.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/ninja-artisan-electric-outdoor-pizza-oven-and-air-fryer-review/ TYHjeoAo7fdpgq7QtXZJiR Sun, 01 Jun 2025 14:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ Thanks to Elho's Smart Pebble, caring for my houseplants has never been easier ]]> I was getting tired of asking why my monstera plant looked so unhappy. It seemed like one of life's great mysteries, one I wasn't solving anytime soon. So when I came across this plant care gadget from Elho, I jumped at the chance of testing it out.

If you're anything like me, you've probably wondered why your monstera is turning yellow or perhaps why its leaves are turning brown at the tips. But when you're a relatively good plant parent, if I do say so myself, it can feel a little frustrating seeing your leafy friend fight for their life.

Annoyed as I was playing this guessing game, the Elho Smart Pebble was kindly sent to me to try out, and I'm actually cross I haven't had this in my life for longer. The riddles of houseplant care are no more, technology is here to make things oh so simple.

What is the Elho smart pebble?

Although they're not on the easiest plants to keep alive list, it's not exactly meant to be rocket science caring for a monstera. And yet I've been finding myself with a pretty unhappy plant consistently, even with a regular watering routine and sunny space.

Now I write about houseplants on a weekly basis, and would consider myself a humble expert at their care. So when my own plant was struggling, I was not only confused but a little embarrassed. Why was it drooping and turning yellow?

Well, thanks to my new best friend, the Elho Smart Pebble, I now have a daily diagnostic coming straight to my phone from the plant, whom I have named Alexis (this will become more relevant later on).

composite of three images showing woman using smart pebble

(Image credit: Elho)

So what exactly is this miracle pebble? It's a small, natural-looking device that lives in your plant pot and helps with catering to all your plant's needs. It will notify you about whether your plant needs more water, light, nutrients, or to be somewhere that's cooler or warmer.

Gone are the days of making houseplant mistakes with this gadget. It comes with an accompanying app that couldn't be easier to use, even if you're not exactly tech-savvy like me.

This tool couldn't be more perfect for very busy households, forgetful workaholics or cursed plant parents surrounded by wilting leaves. It does all the stressful remembering for you and tells you exactly what you need to do. What a dream, right?

How does the Elho smart pebble work?

If you're still a little dubious, much like I was when I first came upon the device, I made sure to take note during set-up and for the past few weeks whilst caring for my indoor plants.

In terms of set-up, it couldn't have been easier. All you need to do is charge the pebble with the cable it comes with, and make sure you've got the free app downloaded. It's then just a matter of connecting your pebble to the app and the WiFi, and then setting up what your plant is and what you want it to be called. Alexis really came from nowhere, perhaps the plant itself?

Once you've followed the simple step-by-step of setting up, the pebble will run its first diagnostics and start measuring what your plant needs. You'll already have access to a thorough expert-led care guide on your plant by this point, which is fantastic in itself.

screenshots of the Elho app

(Image credit: Emily Smith / Elho)

From there, you needn't do much else but follow the pebbles' advice. You'll receive an update every 24 hours, which is customisable and can be tailored even down to the time of day you want to be notified. With each notification, you will be told what your plant needs, whether that's a drink, some fertiliser, or to be moved to a sunnier spot.

The charge lasts around six months, and the device comes with a two-year warranty should you have any issues with it.

And should you want to make sure your plants stay alive whilst you're away, you can quickly check what they need before you go with a press of a button for an immediate report. It's quite mindblowing just how straightforward yet smart this little pebble is.

Would I recommend the elho smart pebble?

If you can't tell from my thoughts already, I would 100% recommend picking up one of these smart pebbles from Elho. For someone who is extremely forgetful about my plants, this is an absolute game-changer.

Like I mentioned before, I know how to care for my plants, but it's the remembering what they need and when that leaves my monstera less than happy some months.

The only downside is that if you have a large collection of plant friends, you will need to buy a pebble for each one, should you want to. However, if that's the case, I'd suggest only getting them for the plants that are the hardest to keep alive in your home.

picture of pebble in the pot of my monstera

(Image credit: Emily Smith)

I think for £39.99, the peace of mind and convenience this gives you makes it a real bargain. It's not necessary for keeping your plants happy and healthy; however, if you do struggle with keeping to your watering routine or remembering to add fertiliser, this will be a big help.


Now you've got backup, why not try caring for a bonsai tree? Even if you're a rookie plant parent, Elho's smart pebble is that helping hand that can make those stubborn species less intimidating.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/elho-smart-pebble-for-houseplants-review/ QSVTDYFXDHcaQeW9uMQXyQ Sun, 01 Jun 2025 10:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ How to grow jasmine for a wall of outrageously pretty, perfumed blooms ]]> Jasmine is a brilliant all-rounder – fragrant, delicate and elegant. Is it any wonder, then, that so many people are still desperate to learn how to grow jasmine and reap the benefits of its perfumed blooms?

Yes, there’s something irresistibly romantic about jasmine. Easily one of the best fragrant plants around, it looks just as beautiful trailing over a sun-drenched archway as it does clambering all over an old brick wall or fence – and adding a sweet perfume to the air as it does so. Despite its exotic feel, it is surprisingly easy to grow, making it a favourite for those who love their outdoor spaces to feel a little bit magical.

While there are winter-flowering and indoor varieties of jasmine, too, it’s the classic summer jasmine that most gardeners fall for. Hardy, fast-growing and generous with its blooms, this classic climbing plant is a brilliant choice for everything from cottage-style gardens to contemporary patios.

How to grow jasmine

Learning how to grow jasmine is surprisingly easy, even if you’re short on space or time. In fact, with a little TLC, this plant can thrive in pots, borders, or trained up walls and fences, making it a brilliant addition to gardens of all sizes and styles. Plus, once it's established, it needs surprisingly little fuss, yet gives back so much.

Still, like all plants, even common jasmine has its preferences, so you'll need to do at least a dab of research if you want to cultivate this gardening trend at home.

"I rate jasmine for its intoxicating scent, resilience, and the way it effortlessly transforms a space with wild, natural beauty," says Christopher O'Donoghue, the director of Gardens Revived.

Going on to explain that there are two main types commonly grown in the UK, Christopher explains that common jasmine (Jasminum officinale) is a "hardy, deciduous climber with highly fragrant white flowers from June to September".

"It's great for outdoor walls and fences," he says, sharing that he's covered his own boring brown fence with these pretty summer blooms.

"Winter Jasmine (Jasminum nudiflorum), on the other hand, isn't scented, but it adds a pop of bright yellow with its flowers over the darker winter months," he adds.

Whichever you pick, you can rest assured that jasmine will be just at home in a modern garden as it will among your favourite cottage garden plants – and they're relatively easy to keep happy, so long as you find them a spot in rich but well-drained soil with lots of sunshine (or at least partial shade).

white flowering jasmine growing on a garden arbour

(Image credit: Future | Mark Bolton)

What you will need

Just as you shouldn't begin mowing your lawn or pruning your roses without the right tools to hand, so the same is true when learning how to grow jasmine.

With this in mind, then, make sure you have:

Your step-by-step guide

Now that you have everything you need, you can learn how to grow jasmine like an absolute gardening pro and add a touch of romance to your outdoor space in no time.

1) Pick your moment

While you can buy (and plant) jasmine throughout the year, it's best to plant your summer jasmine in the spring or autumn, and your winter jasmine in the autumn or winter.

Choose your moment, essentially.

2) Find the perfect location

If you really want to learn how to grow jasmine like a pro, you need to think about where you're planting it every bit as much as the how.

"The more sun, the more flowers," says Christopher, who advises you plant yours in a warm, sheltered spot in full sun or partial shade.

"Against a south or west-facing wall is ideal," he adds.

3) Prep the soil

As per our top gardening tips for beginners, you need to prep the soil if you want to grow jasmine like a pro.

The trick, then, is to mix in plenty of well-rotted organic matter or compost before you add one of the best plants for pollinators.

yellow winter-flowering jasmine

(Image credit: Natalia Spiridonova / iStock / Getty Images Plus / Getty Images)

"The aim is to get your jasmine planted in well-draining, fertile soil," says Christopher. "Add some well-rotted garden compost or horse manure to the mix, then, and mix in some grit if you need to improve drainage."

4) Get planting

If you're learning how to grow jasmine, winter or summer, you'll find these climbers very easy to plant; all you need to do is dig a hole twice the size of the root ball.

"Position it at the same depth it was growing in the pot, and water it well to help its roots settle once it's in the soil," says Christopher.

Be sure to show your jasmine some support in the form of a trellis or wires; this should help it clamber where it needs to go.

5) Water and feed accordingly

While jasmine is one of the best perennials, largely because it tends to do its own thing and come back regardless, you will need to water yours regularly in dry spells throughout the first year.

After this point, jasmine in the ground shouldn't need any additional watering (unless it's a very hot summer), but container plants will need to be kept hydrated.

"It's also a good idea to mulch in spring with compost or well-rotted manure, and feed with a balanced liquid fertiliser every couple of weeks in summer," adds Christopher.

Hey, if it's going to keep one of the most alluring plants to liven up your garden happy, it'll be worth it.

6) And don't forget to prune

The final tip on our How To Grow Jasmine 101 guide is simple enough: don't forget to prune it! Much like we need to give our hair a good trim to keep it healthy and lustrous, so, too, must we do the same with these climbing plants.

"Summer jasmine will need a prune after flowering (late summer) to keep it tidy and encourage new growth," says Christopher, "while winter jasmine should be tackled in early spring after its yellow blooms have done their thing."

The aim is to remove any dead, damaged, or overcrowded stems, although both varieties of jasmine can cope with hard pruning if it's gotten a little out of hand.

FAQs

Does jasmine do better in pots or ground?

You might be wondering if jasmine will do better in pots or the ground, but we have good news: it can thrive in both, depending on the variety and your space.

"Common jasmine grows best planted directly in the ground, where its roots can spread and it has room to climb and flourish. It loves a sunny, sheltered spot with well-drained soil," says Christopher O'Donoghue of Gardens Revived.

"That being said, it also does well in large pots, so long as you feed it regularly, water consistently, and provide support for climbing. Just be aware that container-grown plants may need more help when it comes to overwintering."

Does jasmine come back every year?

Good news, jasmine does, as a general rule of thumb, come back every year.

"Most jasmine varieties are perennials, which means they come back year after year," explains Christopher O'Donoghue of Gardens Revived.

"Both common and winter jasmine are hardy in much of the UK and will return reliably each spring. However, some more tender varieties, like Jasminum polyanthum, may need to be brought indoors or kept in a greenhouse over colder months."


Now that you know how to grow jasmine, we suspect it won't be long before your garden is a perfumed wonderland.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/how-to-grow-jasmine-expert-advice/ LtLfWYbsoeKWyi5uatCPLo Sun, 01 Jun 2025 05:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ The iconic TV and film gardens you can actually visit ]]> The power of TV and film leads to the birth of some very dedicated fandoms. People literally travel across the world just to take a photo where Harry Potter ran through the wall (or into it) to get to platform 9 and ¾ in London. Others trek to New Zealand to the hillside houses of Hobbiton from The Lord of the Rings. The commitment is admirable.

I have to say, there really is something very exciting about standing in the exact place your favourite actor stood, seeing it all with your own eyes. I have put together a list of iconic TV and film gardens you can visit, lawfully, without trespassing. In order to give a little variety, I have also included parks, most of which are free to visit.

32 Iconic TV and film gardens you can visit

Highclere Castle, England

Highclere Castle, England

(Image credit: NIKLAS HALLE'N via Getty Images)

I think there would be anarchy if I didn’t include the Highclere Castle Gardens where Downton Abbey was filmed. Whilst the following of Downton Abbey is not a teenage audience like that of some others on this list, the viewers are probably among some of the people who will most appreciate a garden tour. For the record, I have been an avid Downton Abbey fan since its start in 2010 on ITV. I distinctly remember Lady Mary saying she was “going upstairs to take off her hat”, which people are still talking about as recently as five months ago on a Reddit discussion.

Kualoa Ranch, Hawaii

Kualoa Ranch, Hawaii

(Image credit: Kent Nishimura via Getty Images)

You only need to glance at the photos of Kualoa Ranch, and you can probably make a good guess at some of the 200 or more films that have been shot there. Think anything with jungle, adventure or dinosaurs. So Jurassic Park, Jumanji, George of the Jungle, Godzilla, Kong, Fantasy Island and Lost. The ranch is 4000 acres and is only accessible with a guided tour. Unless you only want to see the gift shop… To see the best film locations, you’ll need to actually go inside with the paid ticket. Apparently, it is worth it ‘100 times over’ according to one visitor.

Basildon Park, England

Basildon Park, England

(Image credit: David Goddard via Getty Images)

Storylines sharing insights into the world of British aristocracy clearly hold a firm place in the hearts of viewers as Bridgerton took the world by storm at its release and has since maintained momentum. Basildon Park gardens appear in both series two and three of the show. The shoot took place in late October, and because of this, the production team had to bring in 5000 artificial flowers to fill the rose garden with summer blooms. Most recently - and spoiler alert - in season three, the Formal Garden provided a setting for Colin and Penelope’s first kiss.

Alnwick Castle, England

Alnwick Castle, England

(Image credit: DEA _ S. VANNINI via Getty Images)

Many people will immediately recognise Alnwick Castle as the film location for the early Harry Potters, amongst several other box office hits. Specifically, the Outer Bailey is where the students learnt to fly broomsticks with Madam Hooch, as well as the rules of Quidditch with Oliver Wood. You can buy tickets for both the castle and the gardens separately, but most people heavily recommend both if you have the time. I'd recommend making this a day trip, taking your picnic, and enjoying it best in the summer.

Central Park, USA

Central Park

(Image credit: NurPhoto via Getty Images)

Where to begin. The Avengers, Enchanted, Home Alone 2, Elf, Night at the Museum, Spider-Man 3 and literally hundreds of others. Central Park is such an iconic place in New York. As a space, it represents a huge playground for producers. In the case of The Avengers in 2012, the team met at Bethesda Terrace to see Thor part with Loki. The entire space is 843 acres, and the most visited urban park in America. It should be on your list to visit if you're in New York anyway, because it's really not one to miss.

Blenheim Palace, England

Blenheim Palace, England

(Image credit: WILL OLIVER via Getty Images)

Where to begin. Blenheim Palace has been used for Queen Charlotte: A Bridgerton Story filming in the Great Court, Inspector Morse filming in the Marlborough Maze, Harry Potter and the Order of the Phoenix filming on the bank of the Great Lake and also James Bond Spectre. Anyone remember the lineup of impressive cars in the evening shots? Even if you’re not interested in filming locations, Blenheim is absolutely stunning and a must-see if you’re even vaguely nearby with some free time. Around Christmas, they put up special lights around the gardens, which are stunning.

Palace of Versailles, France

Palace of Versailles, France

(Image credit: Mike Hewitt via Getty Images)

I’m not going to gush over the Marie Antoinette film. It feels entirely Americanised without even the slightest attempt at an Austrian accent, and hardly a convincing French accent in sight. Despite this, the director was given unprecedented access to the house and gardens. Marie Antoinette’s bedroom in the film was her actual bedroom. There are some stunning exterior shots, including a view looking up at the palace from the lake, which in reality, is a very long walk. Midnight in Paris was also filmed here, which I am more inclined to recommend. The gardens are open every day and are completely free.

Chatsworth House, England

Chatsworth House, England

(Image credit: Christopher Furlong via Getty Images)

Chatsworth is perhaps most famous in the film location world for both Pride and Prejudice and The Duchess. I’m surprised Keira Knightley hasn’t moved in. A fantastic full-circle opportunity to bring Georgina Cavendish back to life, telling her story in her own home and garden, where many scenes are shot. For a fleeting moment, Peaky Blinders used the gardens as Tommy Shelby approached May Carleton’s home. Chatsworth hosts outdoor events all year round, including operas, concerts, movie nights, country fairs and much more. It is widely regarded as one of the most impressive houses in the UK and beyond.

Hatfield House, England

Hatfield House, England

(Image credit: David Goddard via Getty Images)

You’ll certainly recognise Hatfield House as one of the main filming locations for The Favourite, starring Olivia Colman, Emma Stone and Rachel Weisz. All you have to do is look up the trailer on YouTube and the outside of the house is the first thing you’ll see. Shortly after Emma Stone is pushed out of her carriage just as she arrives at the entrance to the gardens. Unsurprisingly, it is another of the many Bridgerton locations, too. The 42-acre estate will not disappoint, especially if you have a full day to enjoy it.

Villla del Balbianello, Italy

Villa del Balbianello, Italy

(Image credit: Athanasios Gioumpasis via Getty Images)

Owned and operated by the FAI, which is the Italian equivalent of the National Trust, Villa del Balbianello was used in two huge movies: James Bond Casino Royale, where Daniel Craig was recovering with Eva Green, and Star Wars II: Attack of the Clones. The villa is open to the public on the shore of Lake Como. The garden and outside space are where you will want to spend most of your time. I’m sure that’s where James Bond would have been in between drinking martinis and destroying historic towns and vintage cars in the name of saving the world.

Painshill Park, England

Painshill Park, England

(Image credit: John Phillips via Getty Images)

Back in 2017, Painshill Park was used for a Black Mirror episode, Hang The DJ. If you’ve seen it, you’ll immediately recognise the lake, the Five Arch Bridge and the Ruined Abbey, which all featured heavily. More recently, surprise surprise, it was used by Bridgerton. In this case, you can once again spot the lake and the bridge where, you too, can promenade, gossip and picnic for the day. Who knows, you might even find a suitor. I'll keep my fingers crossed for an appearance of Anthony Bridgerton.

Bath’s Royal Crescent, England

Bath’s Royal Crescent, England

(Image credit: James D. Morgan via Getty Images)

Whilst these are not extensive manicured gardens you can walk around, the crescent is absolutely worth a visit. It sits just beside and above Royal Victoria Park, where you can also find botanical gardens. All this without paying a penny. The Royal Crescent is known for The Duchess, Persuasion and…Bridgerton. Bath is a stone's throw from several National Trust properties, so seize the opportunity to tick a few off your list. I'd happily walk around all the parks and squares in Bath for days. It feels like you're on a film set.

Cypress Gardens, USA

Cypress Gardens, USA

(Image credit: ClassicStock via Getty Images)

If you find yourself in Charleston, South Carolina, you might recognise the Cypress Gardens from the boat scene in The Notebook. Fans still come here to recreate the magic that once was. I don’t know if I can promise the ducks swarming you, in fact, in all the videos I watched of people's trips there, I don’t think I saw a single duck. Despite this, it is stunning and totally unlike the other non-water-based gardens on this list. It can make for a wonderfully romantic trip, too, so don't miss the chance.

Kenwood House, England

Kenwood House, England

(Image credit: Jonathan McManus via Getty Images)

If the name Anna Scott means anything to you, then maybe you’ll know where I’m going with this. To give you another clue, William Thacker goes to watch the star turn her hand to a classic Henry James adaptation at Kenwood House. It's a timeless classic, Notting Hill, starring Julia Roberts and Hugh Grant. Kenwood House and gardens sit on the edge of Hampstead Heath with acres of manicured grounds flowing into the wild heath itself. Entrance is absolutely free, and you can pick blackberries if you go at the right time of year.

Syon Park, England

Syon Park, England

(Image credit: Oli Scarff via Getty Images)

I’m (not so) sorry to write about Bridgerton again, but it seems there isn’t a stately home in the UK that they haven’t used. You might recognise the Great Conservatory as one of the locations for an extravagant ball. Fire torches lined the pathway, and a beautifully lit dome in the centre of the building. Ringing any bells? The Diplomat season 2, Napoleon and Killing Eve were all filmed here too, amongst so many others. The gardens of Syon Park should rank highly on your list for a grand day out.

Griffith Park and Observatory, USA

Griffith Park and Observatory, USA

(Image credit: Myung J. Chun via Getty Images)

I remember going to see La La Land, not realising it was a musical. Well, what a shock when they start singing and just don’t stop. My fault, but I did love it. Griffith Park appears in a dance sequence at the observatory. If you’re up there in the evening, seize the opportunity to recreate the film’s poster photo with Ryan Gosling and Emma Stone dancing together with the city as the backdrop. It's equally beautiful in the daytime though, and doesn't get too busy with tourists, so you'll be able to enjoy it to its fullest.

Osterley Park, England

Osterley Park, England

(Image credit: Jonathan McManus via Getty Images)

Osterley Park has been used in The Dark Knight Rises, Bridgerton and ITV’s Vanity Fair. It is mostly exterior shots of the impressive house, along with the courtyard, which is usually a quaint tea room. The formal garden was transformed over the course of six years by the National Trust to return it to its 18th-century grandeur. It's a real treat to make your way around the garden whilst learning how they restored Osterly Park to its original layout and style, even if you aren't a horticulturalist.

Englefield House, England

Englefield House, England

(Image credit: Murray Close via Getty Images)

Englefield remains, to this day, a private family home. Richard and Zoe open up the gardens for the public to enjoy on Mondays only.  Tour groups can book to look around the gardens on Tuesday, Wednesday or Thursday, from March to October, led by the Head Gardener. The house is recognisable from X-Men: First Class as the location of Xavier’s academy. Several shots show the exterior of the house and the gardens. It was also used for interior shots in seasons two and three of The Crown. Make sure you plan ahead to get your fix of the impressive outdoors.

Santa Clotilde Gardens, Spain

Santa Clotilde Gardens, Spain

(Image credit: Education Images via Getty Images)

I was expecting to find more Game of Thrones film locations for this list, but I have only found one, or half. The Santa Clotilde Gardens feature in House of the Dragon (so not even Game of Thrones itself) as the King’s Landing gardens where Viserys ponders the fate of the kingdom. The gardens are open to the public daily and are a stunning example of the Noucentisme style. I say that word like I knew what it meant, I didn't. It was a Catalan cultural movement in the early 20th century as a reaction against Modernisme. We’re all learning.

Cliveden House, England

Cliveden House, England

(Image credit: DEA _ G. WRIGHT via Getty Images)

With Cliveden’s proximity to Pinewood Studios, it is home to several well-known films - A Little Chaos, directed by Alan Rickman; Sherlock Holmes with Robert Downey Jnr, and Cinderella. The clock tower was used as the countdown to mark the end of the night at the ball for the shoeless princess to be, and the ornate Fountain of Love is also shown in scenes. The fountain was carved in Rome by Thomas Waldo Story, an American who lived in Rome to cater to the art-loving, wealthy Americans who visited. It is a must-see!

Richmond Park, England

Richmond Park, England

(Image credit: JUSTIN TALLIS via Getty Images)

Richmond Park, to most Londoners, is just another park. It’s in a lovely area of London, but certainly displays a much more modest level of florals in comparison to the stately homes I have listed. Apple TV’s Ted Lasso featured Richmond Park on several occasions as a place for Ted to interact with the public and ponder his life choices. Richmond Park is the largest of the Royal Parks in London, so perfect for picnickers to find a shaded space on a hot day. You can, of course, go in for free, which makes it very appealing to any tourist.

Lyme Park, England

Lyme Park, England

(Image credit: Loop Images via Getty Images)

We’ve already spoken about one Pride and Prejudice film, but let’s look at the earlier 1995 BBC version filmed at Lyme Park in Cheshire. Colin Firth cemented himself firmly as one of Hollywood’s heartthrobs as he pulled himself out of the lake, soaking wet. The shirt later went on to sell at auction for a cool £25,000. Sadly, swimming is not allowed, but there is over 1,400 acres of parkland and some glorious manicured gardens to keep you busy. It has some wonderful shaded spots for a picnic in the summer, too.

Wrest Park, England

Wrest Park, England

(Image credit: Heritage Images via Getty Images)

Said to be some of the most important and largest gardens in Britain, Wrest Park has featured in The Crown, Bridgerton, and Downton Abbey. The orangery and the Archer Pavilion are two must-see parts of the garden, which has been developed over the past 300 years. They show the influence of various eras and designers, in particular, French chateau vibes. This is why the orangery was used in the Downton Abbey party scene at the ‘French Riviera Villa’. You get a little bit of everything, making your way through all the different eras.

Luxembourg Gardens, France

Luxembourg Gardens, France

(Image credit: Kevin Voigt via Getty Images)

You probably saw this one coming. Emily in Paris passes through the Luxembourg Gardens as she goes on her morning jogs. They are completely open and free to access, even with dogs off leashes in certain parts. Nearby, you will find Café de Flore and Deux Magots, which have also featured in the Netflix show. Of course, there are numerous other Emily in Paris locations, but these are close to each other, so easy to see on foot. I'd really recommend coming here in the summer or spring when all the flowers are in bloom.

Stourhead, England

Stourhead, England

(Image credit: Matt Cardy via Getty Images)

There are certain themes we are seeing time and time again. Pride and Prejudice is one of them. The Palladian bridge and temple were the setting for a dampened proposal by Mr Darcy to Elizabeth Bennet in the 2005 version with Keira Knightley. The National Trust’s space will keep you busy with 2,650 acres of countryside to walk through on your visit. They also put on spectacular events and evening shows. If you’re not convinced that a membership is good value at this point, then I don’t know what more I can do.

Castle Howard, England

Castle Howard, England

(Image credit: Loop Images via Getty Images)

Castle Howard was front and centre in Bridgerton’s first season. Their Walled Garden hosted the famous fight scene between Daphne and Nigel, where Daphne actually punches the Baron in self-defence. Part of the garden is still used for vegetables and flowers, with the remainder given to roses. You will also find the Temple of the Four Winds with impressive views across the hills. It's one of those gardens that is a treat for both the eyes and your nose. I could close my eyes and walk around the fragrant paths all day.

Arley Hall, England

Arley Hall, England

(Image credit: Loop Images via Getty Images)

Tommy Shelby managed to create quite an empire in the Peaky Blinders. His business interests were so successful that he found himself living in Arley Hall. A 2,000-acre estate, with 15 acres of that as gardens for you to visit. In the BBC show, you’ll see Tommy’s house blown up, along with many other scenes, making use of the inside of the house too. Netflix also chose Arley Hall for their hit show, Fool Me Once starring Michelle Keegan, Richard Armitage, Adeel Akhtar and Joanna Lumley. How fabulous.

Filoli, USA

Filioi garden

(Image credit: Anadolu via Getty Images)

The Filoli mansion and gardens have featured in several iconic films and TV series, including Dynasty, Dying Young with Julia Roberts, The Game with Michael Douglas, The Wedding Planner with Jennifer Lopez and various others. Filoli boasts tens of thousands of tulips, daffodils and hyacinths in its 16-acre garden. It's majestic. You could even make your visits there a weekly event with their Wellness Wednesday yoga event. If I could live in Filoli, I absolutely would. Doesn't it sound like a dream?

Hyde Park, England

Hyde Park, England

(Image credit: Harvey Meston via Getty Images)

At a meagre 350 acres in comparison to Central Park, despite its notoriety, Hyde Park doesn’t have a long list of films to put to its name. It does, however, have Bridget Jones 1 and 2. In years gone by, the park was used as a hunting ground for Henry VIII when he took the land from Westminster Abbey. There are immaculate separate gardens, especially one dedicated to Princess Diana. Now it is one of London’s most well-known parks and host to events all throughout the year, come rain or shine. Most likely rain.

Stanley Park, Canada

Stanley Park, Canada

(Image credit: Mike Hewitt via Getty Images)

Until 1997, Stanley Park was home to a zoo and had been for over 100 years. It closed in 1996, but they still had a polar bear in very old age until 1997. This made the latter the official closure. Whilst it’s not immediately obvious how to retrace the footsteps of zoo goers, Deadpool gives you a front row view of various parts. The whole park spans 1,000 acres, making it the third-largest park in North America. It's a really different trip to take, especially in the context of these more traditional settings.

Glencoe Nature Reserve, Scotland

Glencoe Nature Reserve, Scotland

(Image credit: Loop Images via Getty Images)

The untarnished beauty of Scotland is no secret. I suppose its relatively remote and rugged nature, combined with a fairly high certainty of rainfall, means that not too many people go there. Their loss is all I can say. You’ll immediately recognise the outdoor scenes from, in my opinion, the best James Bond movie, Skyfall. If you want to make your visit slightly more long-term, it’s nice to know that wild camping is completely legal in Scotland. So pack your bags, and prepare for an adventure and some beautiful views.

Black Park, England

Black Park, England

(Image credit: Orlando Sentinel via Getty Images)

Pinewood Studios has made good use of its surroundings, and this is a brilliant example of one of them. Along with one of the nearby stately homes I mentioned, they have also used Black Park on more than one occasion. Both James Bond, Casino Royale and several of the Harry Potter movies were shot here. Black Park is the real-life forbidden forest. With plenty of parking and more than 500 acres to explore, you are certain to have a memorable experience. Pack a bag and enjoy a day full of beautiful scenery.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/iconic-tv-and-film-gardens-you-can-visit/ Jjt4YXcHi2iygqy2drcNN7 Sat, 31 May 2025 16:49:39 +0000
<![CDATA[ I've been cooking pizzas for decades - this oven condensed all my skills in one simple, but clever feature ]]> The Morsø Forno Spin is, quite simply, the perfect pizza oven. With its sleek design, clever features, and a surprisingly reasonable price tag, it’s hard to find fault. I used it to whip up a full feast of dishes, and it’s now the oven I’ll be recommending to all my friends this summer.

If you’ve done any digging into the best pizza ovens, chances are you’ve come across the Morsø name. This Scandinavian brand is known for bringing the Danish concept of hygge outdoors — pairing beautifully designed ovens with glowing flames and mouthwatering food to create a warm, inviting atmosphere.

What sets the Forno Spin apart is its rotating internal stone — a small innovation that makes a big difference. I’ve been cooking pizzas for over a decade, and the ones I made in the Forno Spin rank among my very best. Even when I handed over the chef’s hat to a total novice, we had restaurant-quality pizza in just over a minute.

Out of all the ovens I’ve tested, this one is a clear winner.

Morsø Forno Spin: Specifications

Morso Forno Spin on the patio

(Image credit: Future)

Dimensions

35 H x 57 W x 53 D cm

Weight

17.11 kgs

Pizza stone size

40cm diameter

Fuel type

Gas (stone is rotated using electrics)

Temperature range

Up to 450°

Rotation speed

1.5-3 RPM

Who would the Morsø Forno Spin suit?

Morso Forno Spin wheel

(Image credit: Future)

I’ve awarded the Morsø Forno Spin ‘Goldilocks’ status for a few reasons. The price sits bang in the middle of the market — it’s half the price of a Gozney, but more expensive than a Ninja — and you get what you pay for. The Forno Spin is well-made and neatly designed, so much so, I think it could last as long as pizza ovens twice the price. It’s a really nice piece of kit, perfect if you want make a decent investment in your outdoor dining.

Another reason I think the Morsø Forno Spin is good for lots of different people is slightly given up in the name: Spin. One of the places everyone goes wrong with cooking in pizza ovens is when you spin it. You get half burnt, half raw bases; holes in the middle because you turned it too soon; or pizzas that get pushed into the fire at the back of the oven. Thanks to the spinning plate in the middle of the Morsø Forno Spin, I had beautiful consistency around all the pizzas and other dishes that I cooked in the oven. I handed over cooking to a complete novice and she achieved the same results. It’s proof that anyone can cook the perfect pizza in here.

Not that I’m superficial, but I shouldn’t also say that this is an elegant pizza oven. I would sit it in pride of place in my garden and happily show it off. Lots of people commented on how nice this looks in tests against less attractive ovens, so you can be pretty secure in knowing this will be a taking point of garden parties. With all that in mind you can see why it’s hard to think of reasons why this might not suit anyone. It’s a real winner.

What is the Morsø Forno Spin like to use?

Temperature gauge on the Morso Forno Spin

(Image credit: Future)

As with every element of the Morsø Forno Spin, setting this up was a breeze. You have two plugs at the back, one is electric for rotating the pizza stone and the other is gas, which screws on. This is easy and faff-free, just make sure you have a socket nearby and a gas canister at the ready.

Once you’ve got everything plugged in, Morsø recommends getting the oven running for 15-20 minutes — by which time my temperature was 450°, as seen on the thermometer on the top of the oven — and then let it cool down for ten minutes. This gets the pizza oven stone hot thoroughly and evenly, without it being a scalding temperature that would burn your pizza without cooking it.

Inside the oven, there’s a nice ring of gas, which promises to cook the pizzas really nice and evenly. You’ve got two dials at the bottom which twist to control the intensity of the flame and the speed at which your oven cooks. It’s a brilliant, straightforward set-up to start off with.

Test 1: pizza

Pizza coming out of the Morso Forno Spin

(Image credit: Future)

Of course, all my pizza oven tests start with making pizzas. I tested out six different bases and topping combinations to check that this can cook lightweight simple orders as well as it can the densely filled, topping-heavy options.

The stone easily had room for my 12-inch pizza bases, made from 8oz of pizza dough. I think you could push your pizzas to 14 inches if you wanted to, but you’d need to find a peel big enough, which is a bigger challenge. My pizzas slid easily into the oven — the mouth is spacious both in width and depth — and they cooked beautifully too.

Over the course of the evening, the Morsø Forno Spin kept great temperature consistency, cooking my pizzas in about ninety seconds, which is the optimum time for getting a good, crispy base and tender toppings without drying out the sauce or crusts.

I am not exaggerating when I say that I have hundreds of photos of pizzas cooked in this oven, just because they came out so beautifully and evenly crisped up. I’ve never seen anything like it. The extra difference — the one that the photos don’t show — is that I had time and brain space to chat to people. I could leave the Forno Spin to rotate and cook the pizza and speak to my testing crew without needing to have my head stuck in the oven and a peel constantly on hand. This extra benefit enhanced for people who haven’t used pizza ovens before, because, for them, learning how to turn, and evenly cook a pizza in an oven is no mean feat, often resulting in some pizza tragedies. You actually can’t put a price on that kind of ease.

Test 2: roasted vegetables

Vegetables cooked in the Morso Forno Spin

(Image credit: Future)

With the pizza success settled in my stomach, I moved on to roasting a skillet of vegetables. This is a really nice accompaniment to any al fresco meal and it’s a great way to test out a low and slow cooking task. Once again, the skillet slid nicely onto the pizza stone and it rotated easily around. Other ovens that I’ve used which have rotation integrated can wobble a bit with the weight of a skillet, but this is solid.

I timed three minutes and checked the vegetables and, whilst I had some nice charring on the edge of my onions, I wanted to give them a little more time. Two more minutes of drool-worthy smells coming out of the oven did the trick. I had all the lovely speckling across my vegetables, they were tender, well-cooked, and absolutely delicious. It’s confirmed. The Morsø Forno Spin can do low and slow too.

Test 3: nachos

Nachos cooked in the Morso Forno Spin

(Image credit: Future)

The next test that I run is the opposite of low and slow. I whack nachos in the oven, because this is a nice, quick, easy starter to bring out if you’re eating from the pizza oven and want some nibbles. This only needed thirty seconds and a quick spin around the oven before the chips were toasted, the cheese was melted, and my nachos were looking more than good enough to eat — another great success.

Test 4: cookies

Cookies made in the Morso Forno Spin

(Image credit: Future)

My tests are not complete without a sweet treat, so I tested out cookies on a tray. I wanted to see whether a square tray would work inside the oven, especially on rotation. As you can see, it did. The sugar in cookies can make them temperamental and tricky to cook, but in two minutes, I had the perfect batch ready to eat. You can see they had nice, even colouring and they’d cooked through really well. These were, without a doubt, the best cookies that I have made in a pizza oven.

Cleaning the Morsø Forno Spin

Morso Forno Spin wheel

(Image credit: Future)

The Morsø Forno Spin is a really low maintenance oven. You will get flour from your pizza on the stone, but this brushes and burns off in time, so you won’t need to worry about it. My main piece of advice would be to buy a heat-proof cover for it, especially if it’ll be exposed to the elements, so that it doesn’t get a battering from wind, rain, sticks, sand, and various pieces of debris. It’s too pretty to leave exposed.

How does the Morsø Forno Spin compare?

Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven and Air Fryer next to the Morso Forno Spin

(Image credit: Future)

I had this lined up with the new Ninja Artisan Pizza Oven and the Gozney Arc XL for our tests and the whole team agreed that this is a really nice mid-point. It’s the easiest and most accessible gas pizza oven I’ve tested so far and the price is decent, especially if you want style and quality.

The closest competition is on that I actually tested a couple of weeks before: the DeliVita. This is a stylish, little Italian oven. The DeliVita has a more authentic Italian look and style of cooking, as opposed to the Morsø Forno Spin's Scandinavian elegance. Different homes will suit different styles of ovens, neither is better than the other.

Technically, the ovens are quite different too. The DeliVita is available as either a wood-fired oven, or as a dual-fuel wood and gas oven. Both are more expensive than the Morsø Forno Spin and you don't get the helping hand of a rotating pizza stone inside your oven. Therefore, it's easier for anyone to get better results in the Morsø Forno Spin. The only downside is that it isn't as well-insulated as the DeliVita, which can sit on any surface, as it is completely insulated. The outside of the DeliVita doesn't get hot at all, whilst the Morsø Forno Spin, like most pizza ovens can get quite hot. With that in mind, I'd keep little ones away from the latter, but that's the only downside to the Morsø Forno Spin. In all other respects, it's a winner.

Should you buy the Morsø Forno Spin?

Olive pizza cooked in the Morso Forno Spin

(Image credit: Future)

I’ve told you what I think of the Morsø Forno Spin — it’s nothing short of perfect. I’ve been cooking pizzas for over a decade and this quickly made its way into my heart as one of the best that I’ve ever tested. I have a feeling some of the testing crew will be buying these for their gardens very soon too.

How we test

Pizzas cooked in the Ninja Artisan Electric Outdoor Pizza Oven and Air Fryer

(Image credit: Future)

The reviews that you see on woman&home don’t come about by chance. I have been cooking on pizza ovens for over a decade and have condensed all my experience into this testing process. I aim to cover your classics: making pizza to test the fundamental features of the oven; roasting vegetables for a low and slow approach; baking sweet treats to see how versatile it is; and whipping up nachos to test how speedily it can toast and melt. I’ll repeat these tests until I’m satisfied that I have a good grasp of exactly what the oven can do and who it would suit.

Then, once that’s sured-up, I will write my review. I’ll explain the tests, but also talk about generally what the oven is like to use, whether it needs to be cleaned (and how to do it), how it compares to other models on the market, and who it suits. By the end of the review, you should have a good idea of whether this is the right oven for you and whether any other models would suit you better. If you still have questions, don’t hesitate to email me. Just don't expect me to stop talking. I love pizza ovens.

You can find out more about how we test pizza ovens over here.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/morso-forno-spin-pizza-oven-review/ 4J4i6VhbRboFwzTgMin2xS Sat, 31 May 2025 10:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ A professional gardener advises doing this one thing 'before the hosepipe ban' to keep plants healthy in hot weather ]]> While hot weather offers plenty of reasons to rejoice, when it comes to gardening, it can prove somewhat problematic.

Most gardeners ask whether they should water outdoor plants every day in hot weather, but what if a hosepipe ban is suddenly brought into place? It's not uncommon to restrict water usage when experiencing warm climate conditions, so what would that mean for watering your garden plants?

After reporting the 'driest spring start since 1956', the Environment Agency is warning about the possible risk of drought this summer. "Whilst there are currently no plans for hosepipe bans, if the prolonged dry weather continues, water companies may need to implement their dry weather plans in the weeks and months ahead."

To stay ahead of the situation, we've spoken to a professional gardener who is sharing tips and tricks to keep garden trends thriving during dry conditions.

Expert tip: mulching in hot weather to help keep plants healthy

"With summer rolling in fast, a hosepipe ban is looking likely and could spell disaster for gardens," says professional gardener Opheus Alexander. "Having spent the spring lovingly preparing the garden for another year, cutting back, weeding and even popping to the garden centre for some new additions, losing plants to drought can be heartbreaking (and expensive)."

To prevent heartbreak, he recommends applying a layer of mulch to aid moisture retention. So, what is mulching, and why does it help with keeping your plants hydrated? "Mulching helps the plants to regulate the uncertain watering by hugely cutting down on evaporation," Orpheus explains.

"The extra layer of mulch around the base of the plant acts as an insulating layer that stops the water in the soil from drying up in the sun. This means you can use the watering can, safe in the knowledge your plants will be happy."

Mulching is typically a winter gardening job to insulate the soil to protect plants from frost and help prevent weeds, so it's interesting to see how it can be used as efficiently in the summer months.

"Although mulching is usually done in late winter, applying extra mulch before a hosepipe ban can be key to ensuring your plants make it through the summer while looking their best."

To use this technique to help your outdoor plants stay hydrated in hot weather, Orpheus recommends doing the following: "Water deeply first to lock in moisture (Which is why it’s essential to do this before a hosepipe ban)

"Then apply your mulch 5 - 8cm (2-3 in) thick. Make sure to keep it a few cm away from the stems to prevent rot."

Split image of a watering can watering a rose bush and a person applying a layer of mulch to trap the moisture in hot weather

As Orpheus recommends give plants a 'deep water' before applying a layer of mulch (Image credit: Future | Amateur Gardening)

"I recommend using organic mulch (e.g. composted bark, leaf mould or well-rotted manure), which will also help improve the soil over time. If none of those are available, a good peat-free compost will work just fine." This applies to all soil types.

Using an organic mulch and homemade compost is all the better for embracing sustainable gardening solutions.

The outdoor plants to mulch in hot weather: Orpheus' recommendations

  • Shallow-Rooted Perennials: "These plants dry out quickly and can suffer during dry spells: Things like Heuchera, Geranium, Primula, Alchemilla mollis."
  • Newly planted Shrubs and Trees and Hedges: "They haven’t yet established deep roots so mulch will keep the soil moist while roots develop, as well as protecting the young roots from heat and dry air."
  • Fruit and Vegetable Plants: "Edibles are thirsty and sensitive to drought stress. Things like tomatoes, courgettes, beans, strawberries as well as fruit trees and bushes."
  • Moisture-loving plants: "Plants that need steady moisture levels like Hostas, Astilbe, Ferns and Lobelia cardinalis."
  • Plants in dry sunny spots: "Even drought-tolerant plants will benefit from the reduced evaporation. Plants like Lavender, Hylotelephium, Eryngium and Santolina."

There's no UK hosepipe ban currently in place, but it's well worth keeping an eye on your local council website and checking in with your water supplier. "The EA is closely monitoring water companies’ implementation of these plans." So the story is an ever-evolving one.

When we do get a downpour, it's well worth using the best rainwater harvesting ideas to conserve water to help hydrate the plants without reaching for the hose.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/homes-news/gardener-shares-hosepipe-ban-tip-for-plants-in-hot-weather/ iisC9kP7nD8WQYUTda9jaH Sat, 31 May 2025 05:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ Fast-growing shrubs – 8 top choices recommended by gardening experts ]]> Fast-growing shrubs bring long-lasting structure to the garden, unlike annual bloomers, which last just one growing season. With the right care they will establish quickly, and can be used as hedging, as ornamental specimens in the border, or even as container plants.

From fragrant flowering show-stoppers that are good for wildlife to varieties with colour-changing leaves, there's a shrub to suit any garden trend. Tall, evergreen ones are valuable for shade, shelter, or screening, while some deciduous shrubs will dazzle in winter with their vibrant bark.

I asked gardening experts for their recommendations for fast-growing shrubs, and they shared their insights below. You'll also find useful tips for looking after them, to help them establish beautifully in your space.

Update your outdoor space with these 8 fast-growing shrubs

While some shrubs are more drought-tolerant than others, most will need proper watering regularly as they get established. Mulching around the base will help the soil retain moisture and keep weeds at bay, but it's generally recommended to keep mulch away from the main stem to avoid the risk of rot and disease.

1. Photinia fraseri "Red Robin"

'Red Robin' photinia shrub

This shrub brightens the garden in spring (Image credit: Moonstone Images / iStock / Getty Images)

Emma Fell, head of horticulture at Hillier, recommends Photinia fraseri “Red Robin” for our list of fast-growing shrubs. “This bold, upright, evergreen shrub is known for its vibrant red new growth in spring, which gradually matures to a glossy green,” she says.

“It responds well to pruning, making it a striking alternative to traditional hedging plants like cherry laurel," Emma continues. "You can trim it into a formal hedge or allow a more relaxed, natural shape.” When left to grow to its full size, “Red Robin” can reach four to five metres tall, she adds. You can buy Photinia fraseri "Red Robin" from Hillier.

If you’re short on space, Emma suggests opting for “Little Red Robin”, highlighting how it offers the same vivid colour and interest in a compact form and is ideal for planting in containers or in small borders. As a bonus point, both types also produce white flowers in spring when planted somewhere sunny.

2. Buddleia davidii

buddleia in bloom

Butterfly bush flowers have a honey-like scent (Image credit: Pavel Sergijchuk / iStock / Getty Images Plus / Getty Images)

“This shrub, commonly known as ‘butterfly bush’, is known for its long panicles of deep purple flowers,” says Chris Bonnett of GardeningExpress. “Not only is its colour striking, but it's also a must-have for those looking to create a wildlife-friendly garden, as it's great for attracting butterflies, bees and other pollinators.

“Butterfly bush blooms from mid-summer to early autumn, is easy to grow, and low-maintenance,” he continues. He says it thrives in well-drained soil and full sun – “too much shade can hinder growth and lead to fewer flowers.”

Chris recommends pruning these shrubs hard in early spring to encourage fresh stems and also to deadhead the plants regularly.

For a classic purple hue, try “Ile de France”, available from GardeningExpress, while “White Profusion”, also from GardeningExpress, complements the quiet luxury garden trend.

3. Euphorbia characias subsp wulfenii

Euphorbia characias subsp. wulfenii with flowers

A good match for a Mediterranean-style garden (Image credit: Geoff Smith / Alamy Stock Photo)

“Number one on our list is Euphorbia characias subsp wulfenii, a native of the Mediterranean area – so well suited to the climate we are experiencing just now,” says Dickon Harding, gardens and landscape manager at Raby Castle.

“It has been used to great effect here by renowned garden designer Luciano Giubbilei. Planted in long drifts, it reaches over a metre in height with magnificent yellow-green whorls of flowers, the foliage being a beautiful glaucous green.” Its striking blooms make it a good plant for pollinators.

Choose a planting position that has full sun and well-draining soil to help it grow at its best. Although it’s a shrub, Dickon recommends treating each individual stem as a biennial – “once a stem has flowered in its second year, cut it off so that you have continual fresh growth.” Remember to wear gloves when handling this plant to protect your skin from the toxic sap (and keep it safely out of reach of pets and children).

Euphorbia characias subsp. wulfenii plants are available from Crocus in a range of pot sizes.

4. Common ninebark

Physocarpus opulifolius in flower

Another fast-growing shrub with bold foliage colour (Image credit: Olga Ionina / iStock / Getty Images)

"For a beautiful display, look no further than Physocarpus opulifolius, also known as common ninebark," says Emma. "Physocarpus opulifolius is a striking deciduous shrub that brings bold colour and texture to the garden."

"Known for its dramatic foliage, this hardy plant comes in a range of eye-catching shades – from the deep burgundy tones of ‘Diabolo’ and ‘Lady in Red’ [available from Hillier] to the bright golden leaves of ‘Dart’s Gold’," she continues. "In early summer, it produces clusters of small pink or white flowers, which are followed by decorative seed heads that add extra seasonal interest."

According to Emma, these alluring plants are easy to grow in most soil types and are tolerant of exposed sites. It can be pruned to a shape or size to suit your space, she adds – "whether you’re after a neat, compact form or something a little more free-flowing."

5. Golden mock orange

Golden mock orange flowers

Plant golden mock orange somewhere sunny (Image credit: Andrew Greaves / Alamy Stock Photo)

Chris also recommends the golden mock orange (available from GardeningExpress), for our list of fast-growing shrubs, which is also known as Philadelphus coronarius "Aureus". He highlights its white, orange-blossom-scented flowers throughout June and July, and how its bright yellow leaves become a greenish yellow as they mature.

"These shrubs look great as part of a border, and they can cope with poor and dry soil if need be," he continues. "Ideally, you’ll want to plant this in full sun. While it can handle some light shade, keep in mind that too much can reduce flowering. It can spread over time, so leave plenty of room around it to allow for good airflow." He also recommends growing these fragrant plants near a path or open window, so you can appreciate their scent.

In terms of pruning, Chris advises giving it a trim right after flowering, removing the oldest stems at the base to keep it well-shaped.

6. Cornus alba "Sibirica"

Cornus alba ‘Sibirica' with red stems and leaves

A statement shrub for the winter garden (Image credit: Anne Gilbert / Alamy Stock Photo)

Also known as red-barked dogwood (and available from GardeningExpress), Chris says this shrub is perfect if you're after winter colour and a long-lasting display. "It’s versatile and can handle partial shade, and its vibrant and fiery red stems will make a statement in any garden."

Although it’s adaptable, Chris says it works best in moist and well-drained soil, adding that the red bark colour is brightest when grown in full sun. "When it comes to pruning, you’ll want to do this in late winter or early spring each year to promote new colourful shoots."

Why not consider some winter bedding plants for your outdoor space, too? That way, you'll have even more to admire during the colder months.

7. Hebe rakaiensis

Hebe rakaiensis with white flowers

An evergreen plant with pretty white blooms (Image credit: Kay Roxby / Alamy Stock Photo)

"Hebe rakaiensis is another great plant for pollinators – it forms a neat, compact mound very quickly that is covered in lovely white flowers from early summer," says Dickon. "Alistair Baldwin, who designed our landscapes beyond the Walled Gardens, has just planted many of these as they make such great contrasts with the looser perennials around them." They are also evergreen, offering year-round colour to a garden.

He highlights how these plants, also known as shrubby Veronica, are native to New Zealand, which has a similar climate to our own. "This makes them generally trouble-free, although any plants with such dense foliage can suffer from fungal diseases due to reduced airflow."

Ideally, plant this shrub in well-draining soil that gets either full sun or partial shade. It can work well as a rockery plant.

8. Hydrangea arborescens “Annabelle”

hydrangea 'Annabelle'

"Annabelle" has large, white blooms (Image credit: Mayberry / Alamy Stock Photo)

"Although the elegant quercifolia that fills our South border may be a bit slow for some, many hydrangeas are quick to grow and nearly as beautiful!" says Dickon. "Try Hydrangea arborescens “Annabelle” if you like huge, showy blooms. It has compact growth, but given a rich soil, it will quickly grow into a substantial plant."

"Annabelle" is available to buy from Crocus, and the flowers look just as gorgeous in the garden as they do cut for the vase. Our guides on when to plant hydrangeas and how to prune hydrangeas are well worth a read if you're considering this shrub for your space.

FAQs

What are some good fast-growing shrubs to create a hedge?

Hedges offer a natural way to divide spaces and create garden privacy, and are beneficial to wildlife, too. Jamie Shipley, gardening expert and managing director of Hedges Direct, says beech is one of the most popular hedging varieties.

"Although it’s not evergreen, the winter leaves will stay intact until the new growth is ready in spring, making it a great alternative to an evergreen hedge – and you’ll get the added advantage of beautiful red and golden autumn foliage," he says. "It’s also a relatively fast grower – approximately 30-60cm per year – and requires less maintenance than the more rapid growers, like Leylandii."

For a privacy hedge that protects against the elements, he suggests cherry laurel, an evergreen shrub with dense, glossy foliage. "This is one of the most attractive hedging varieties as not only does it boast lush, shiny leaves, but it also produces white flowers in the spring and festive red berries in the winter. It also has a relatively fast growth rate of around 30-60cm per year," he adds.

However, he does note that the root system can be extensive and invasive, "so it might not be the best choice for an area with limited space with lots of obstructions like pavements and buildings.

"It’s also important to note that cherry laurel berries and leaves are toxic if ingested, so this might not be the best option for those with pets and children," he warns.

cherry laurel with white flowers

Cherry laurel hedges are covered with flowers in spring (Image credit: Iva Vagnerova / iStock / Getty Images)

Which fast-growing shrubs will suit a small garden?

Look for smaller varieties, such as Photinia fraseri “Little Red Robin”, mentioned above. Checking the eventual growing size before you plant is always a good idea.

Chris recommends Japanese spiraea, as you can go for compact varieties like "Goldflame" or "Little Princess" (available at GardeningExpress). "Their growth remains compact, but they are still fast-growing and will fill out nicely within a season or two. They’re also low maintenance, easy to prune and can tolerate drought once established."

Spiraea japonica

Spiraea japonica "Goldflame" (Image credit: Botany vision / Alamy Stock Photo)

What are some top tips for growing shrubs in containers?

Many varieties of shrubs can be grown in pots. Dickon recommends adding perlite for drainage and applying a general-purpose fertiliser in the summer, with regular watering.

"The size of the container is really important too," says Chris. "Make sure you are choosing one large enough to give the plant enough room for healthy growth and stability."


Looking for more recommended plants to add to your garden this year? Our guides on late-summer flowers and best plants for shade have plenty of pretty picks to choose from.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/fast-growing-shrubs-advice/ 8v28g8PfkMBBQbCMFYGcoa Thu, 29 May 2025 06:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ I take back everything I said about bullet blenders - Tefal's beats them all ]]> Traditionally, bullet blenders have always been the go-to for gym bunnies who love their smoothies. Beyond that, they can be limited, loud, and lacking in longevity. Tefal has turned all that on its head and made a bullet blender that blows everyone else’s out of the water (or soups and smoothies, given the subject matter).

The best blenders, especially for crushing ice, working quietly, and making soups have always been bigger, more expensive models. And yet, as you will see, with every test that I put the Tefal Blend Up through, it scored full marks for speed and noise levels. It’s almost too good to believe, except I saw it with my own eyes.

I have since used this every day to work through all my blending tasks — of which there are many — and I have to share them with you. I haven’t been this excited about a blender in a long time. 

Tefal Blend Up Specifications

Tefal Blend Up Bullet Blender components

(Image credit: Future)

RRP

£99.99

Dimensions

14.5D x 18.5W x 35H centimetres

Weight

4.1 kgs

Capacity

850 ml and 450 ml

Power

1000 watt

Pre-sets

Auto-clean, cold soup, plant milk, dips, sauce, smoothie, ice crush, silence. pulse

Jug material

BPA-free Tritan

Unboxing the Tefal Blend Up

Tefal Blend Up Bullet Blender unboxed

(Image credit: Future)

The Tefal Blend Up looks like it comes in a big box for its size, but it’s just really well packaged. There is some plastic, but it’s made from some recycled materials and Tefal recommends finding recycling points to dispose of the single use plastic in a sustainable way. It’s nice to see them making the effort. 

Inside the box you get a big blending cup (850ml), a small one (450ml), a cleaning tool, a recipe guide, the base station, and lids for both the blending cups. That’s a great little set up for the blender and it’ll really help to get the most out of the Tefal. Overall, it’s a great start. 

Who would the Tefal Blend Up suit?

Smoothie made in the Tefal Blend Up Bullet Blender

(Image credit: Future)

The first thing I have to mention is quiet mode. If you blend early in the morning or you have an open plan kitchen with people chatting in, you don’t want to bring the house down with the sound of ice crushing and smoothie making at 6am. I was skeptical that this would do anything, after all, there are very few truly quiet blenders on the market, but the team and I were really impressed with the difference. We had to shout to be heard over the 72 dB smoothie noise, but in quiet mode, none of us had to raise a voice over the 34 dB it produced. To give you a gauge of this, it’s louder than a lm electric toothbrush, but quieter than a coffee machine. Much quieter, actually. 

The Tefal Blend Up also claims to be the first mini blender with culinary functions, which makes it really handy if you’re after a small, bullet blender, but one that can make more than smoothies. This has capacity for nut milks, cold soup, dips, crunched ice (it’s actually the first bullet blender that I’ve ever used which can crush ice), and more. 

You’re also helped out by travel lids, which make this not just versatile in function, but also in where you can go. if you’re a gym bunny or busy person that needs to take their coffees with them on the go, this is a brilliant, simple blender. 

What is the Tefal Blend Up like to use?

Tefal Blend Up Bullet Blender control panel

(Image credit: Future)

The Tefal is really easy to get blending with. You’ll have two different sizes of blending cups, a 850ml and a 450ml, which both have lids. These screw onto a blade base, which locks onto the blender. On the blender station, you’ve got a dial with all the different pre-sets — smoothie, crushed ice, quiet, dip, sauce, nut milk, cold soup, and pulse — which you press and then touch the middle button to start. These are auto-timed, so you won’t need to keep an eye on the blender. You can just let it run and do whatever other jobs that need attending to and then come back to it when you need to. 

Test 1: smoothies and protein shakes

Protein shake made in the Tefal Blend Up Bullet Blender

(Image credit: Future)

I start all my blender tests with smoothies, not just because I live my life by consuming smoothies, but because they’re a great test for any blender. My classic tests involves frozen blueberries (these are icy and have tough skin), raspberries (to test seeds), oats (to test fibre), spinach (to test more tough skin), and almond milk (to help things along). I whizzed all this with a banana (for flavour) and got a really nice smoothie in exactly one minute. There wasn’t a seed, grain, lump, or fibre in sight. 

Given that this test had gone well, I thought I would see what happened when I added a scoop of protein powder in the mix. This can make things go a bit lumpy — and that’s at the best of times — so it’s a test that I always like to run. I added in my scoop of protein and the smoothie stayed, well, smooth. I guess it’s in the name. The protein powder didn’t cling to the edge and I didn’t end up with any powdery lumps in my drink. All in all, it was a great success. 

Test 2: dips and hummus

Hummus made in the Tefal Blend Up Bullet Blender

(Image credit: Future)

This is a tougher test, because there’s a lot less liquid in dips, which doesn’t always help when you have a bullet blender with small blades at the bottom of the cup. Nonetheless, it’s a test that I run on all my blenders, so it’s only fair that the Tefal has to face it too. 

I tipped a cup of chickpeas, a teaspoon of cumin, a squeeze of lemon juice, tahini, and a pinch of salt into the blender and set it running in the dip setting. Whilst it wasn’t as quick as the smoothie function, I did see some smooth hummus being made close to the blades. The top section of my hummus remained pretty untouched, so I gave the blender a shake and a rattle around, as well as a quick stir. This is pretty normal levels of involvement for a bullet blender, because they’re not really made for dips. However, with my token interference, I managed to get a really decent hummus. There was a little more texture than your average shop-bought dip, but it was scoopable, well blended, and still really delicious. 

I followed this up with wild garlic pesto, salsa, and guacamole, all made in the Tefal, and got really great results. These softer ingredients whizzed up into smooth, delicious dips really effortlessly, so you could definitely use this for dips and sauces.

Test 3: crushed ice

Crushed ice in the Tefal Blend Up Bullet Blender

(Image credit: Future)

Before I started this test, I have to confess that I said to the team “this won’t work.” I’ve only had success truly crushing ice in models that are ten times the price and size of the Tefal and yet, to my shock, this misted ice like some of the best blenders I’ve tested. I still don’t know what magic is behind the Tefal, but it’s seriously good stuff. Get the frozen cocktails ready. 

Test 4: soup

Pea soup made in the Tefal Blend Up Bullet Blender

(Image credit: Future)

Bullet blenders can’t traditionally be used to make soup. I won’t go into the science of it (not my area of expertise), but you need your ingredients to be cool so that you don’t crack or explode your blender. With cool peas, mint, cooled stock, cooked (and cooled) garlic and onion, I made a delicious pea and mint soup. You can see that it was really creamy and smooth — I couldn’t have achieved better results in any other blender that I’ve tested. 

Cleaning the Tefal Blend Up

The base of the Tefal Blend Up Bullet Blender

(Image credit: Future)

Tefal says that the blending cups are all dishwasher safe, so if you want to, you can put yours in the dishwasher and clean it that way. Alternatively, you can wash these really easily by hand. Tefal gives you a clever brush that gets under the blades of the blender really effectively and can clear right to the base of the blending cup if you’re struggling to reach some smoothie. The control dial on the front of the Tefal will also need a wipe and polish, especially if you have food on your hands, but it doesn’t show up dirt as much as other control panels are prone to. 

How does the Tefal Blend Up compare?

Nutribullet Triple Prep System smoothie

(Image credit: Future)

I’m yet to test another portable blender that is as quiet as this. I also haven’t tested one that crushes ice as well either, so if those are your priorities, you don’t even need to consider another model. However, if you want to see what else is out there for you and your smoothies, there are some options worth trying. Most notably, there’s the NutriBullet Pro 900. This classic design is simplicity at its finest: push and twist to get a delicious smoothie. It offers more capacity and a super simple set-up, although you do lose the timer that will automatically stop blending with the Tefal Blend Up and the pulse options. The NutriBullet is really well priced for what it is though, so it’s also a winner if you’re looking to save some money on your smoothie habit. 

Should you buy the Tefal Blend Up?

Tefal Blend Up Bullet Blender box

(Image credit: Future)

I’ve been really impressed with the Tefal Blend Up. It offers some exceptional functions that other bullet blenders really can’t compete with. It’s quiet, versatile, and really stylish, so if you’re blending for one or two people, you don’t need to look any further. 

How we test

Smoothie made in the large cup of the Tefal Blend Up Bullet Blender

(Image credit: Future)

At woman&home, all the blenders that you see reviewed have been through exactly the same set of tasks. I score them on what they are like to use, their appearance, settings, and value for money. Then, I have a series of real-life tasks, designed to emulate your day-to-day life, that I put them through. I make smoothies and protein shakes — because what’s a blender without smoothies — as well as dips, crushed ice, and soup if it will let me. I’ll clean it and let you know if that’s an easy process (some models don’t let you submerge the blender) and then compare it to similar models on the market so you know whether you’re getting value for money. After that, you should be pretty clued up on the blender, but if you still have questions, don’t hesitate to ask me about them.

If you want to know more about how we test blenders, you can visit our dedicated page.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/tefal-blend-up-bullet-blender-review/ 6ATHRL9ambDhKLz9pEvRaR Thu, 29 May 2025 05:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ How to prune an olive tree to guarantee growth and reduce the risk of disease ]]> Do you want your garden to feel like a Mediterranean haven all summer long? Then it's time to brush up on your pruning skills and keep your olive trees fruitful and healthy this season.

While you may already know how to overwinter your olive trees, pruning them is just as important to guarantee long-lasting growth and fruit production. Pruning doesn't take much time and effort, but the difference it makes to your plant's health is astonishing.

And with Mediterranean-inspired gardens on the rise, we thought it best to ask the plant experts for their no-nuisance advice on pruning olive trees.

How to prune an olive tree, according to horticulture experts

As one of the best trees for pots, olive trees are becoming increasingly popular as both indoor and outdoor plants. They're often sold at reduced rates during spring and are easy to care for, making them an unsurprising staple in UK gardens.

However, in order to keep the tree happy and growing, it'll need to be pruned in the right way.

"When pruning an olive tree, I always recommend a gentle, methodical approach," says Luke Newnes, gardening content creator and member of Interior Squad at Hillarys.

picture of young olive trees in garden in pots

(Image credit: Getty Images)

"Start by removing any dead, diseased, or damaged branches, these are the first to go. Next, thin out any crossing or crowded branches at the centre of the tree. Olive trees like plenty of air and light reaching the inner canopy," he instructs.

When shaping the tree, he recommends shortening overlong, straggly branches and aiming for an open, goblet-like shape. Think of a martini glass, very apt for an olive tree. This particular shape helps sunlight penetrate and encourages growth.

"Stand back regularly and check the overall shape as you go. Prune lightly—olive trees don’t need harsh cutting back," he adds.

Shop pruning essentials

What are the benefits of pruning an olive tree?

In the same way, there are various benefits to learning how to deadhead plants properly, pruning is great for your olive tree.

"Firstly, it encourages fruit production as pruning controls the growth of the tree and helps it divert energy into producing fruit instead of foliage," explains Graham Smith, MCIHort, horticulture expert at LBS Horticulture.

"Secondly, removing dead, diseased or damaged branches prevents any spread of disease. It also allows more air and sunlight to penetrate the tree canopy, which can reduce the likelihood of fungal infections," he adds.

Graham also points out that pruning will help you shape the tree and control its size. Which in turn maintains its structure, makes it easier to harvest, ensures the longevity of the plant and stops it growing too large.

How often should you prune an olive tree?

picture of a olive tree in a kitchen

(Image credit: Getty Images)

When it comes to the regularity of pruning, it might surprise you how little you need to get your secateurs out.

"I recommend giving olive trees a light prune every year, just to keep them tidy and healthy," recommends Luke. "A more substantial pruning can be done every couple of years if the tree is getting too dense or unruly. The key is little and often – olive trees respond best to regular, gentle shaping rather than heavy, infrequent cuts.”

FAQs

What month do you prune olive trees?

There are plants you should prune in May and plants that should never be pruned in autumn, so when is the sweet spot for your olive tree?

“The best time to prune olive trees is in late spring, just as the risk of frost has passed and before the new growth gets going. In the UK, that usually means April or May. Avoid pruning in autumn or winter, as cuts can be vulnerable to cold damage,” advises Luke.

So you might want to add it to the top of your list of essential summer jobs to get done before the hot weather properly arrives.

picture of personal pruning an olive tree with secateurs

(Image credit: Getty Images)

How do you train an olive tree shape?

As the experts mentioned, the shape of your olive tree can determine its ability to grow and stay healthy. So, how can you keep it under control?

"When it comes to shaping an olive tree, patience is key. Prune lightly each year, gradually guiding the tree into the shape you want – whether that’s a classic open goblet, a single trunk standard, or something more architectural," says Luke.

"Don’t try to force a dramatic change all at once. Take your time, step back often to assess the shape, and remember that olive trees are slow growers, so shaping them is a long-term project," he adds.


If you can't find one of those pre-summer deals on olive trees in your local supermarkets, then buying plants online is a great alternative. With seasonal sales and easy delivery, picking up your plants both indoor and out online can be a much easier way.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/how-to-prune-an-olive-tree-expert-advice/ BZgvUKbPqt7J9rM4tCaU8N Wed, 28 May 2025 05:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ The new butter yellow decor trend is good enough to eat, and the interior experts say it's here to stay ]]> There's no denying that 2025 is the year we return to colourful homes and fun interiors, and the newest butter yellow trend is here to prove that.

From elegant yet exciting pistachio green decor to the ever-popular curated clutter trend, it's clear that homeowners and interior brands are ready to be playful with home styling again.

Butter yellow first arrived this year in the interior paint colour trends and has slowly grown in popularity. You now can't enter a high street shop without seeing a wash of butter yellow spread over the home sections.

So if you're ready to drown in butter yellow but need a little more context, we chatted to interior experts to get the low down on this trending hue and how to welcome it into your home.

What is the butter yellow decor trend?

So, what is the butter yellow trend, and how does the colour differ from yellows like Dulux's Colour of the Year, 'True Joy'?

"Butter yellow is a joyful and positive colour that brings tonnes of warmth, brightness and comfort to our homes and wardrobes alike. Capturing the optimism of spring and the energy of summer, this soft, uplifting hue evokes a cheerfulness that makes it perfect for dressing and decorating across the seasons," explains Helen Ashmore, head of design at Laura Ashley.

"In interiors, Butter Yellow shades have a gentle luminosity that reflects natural light beautifully, helping to make spaces feel sunnier, lighter and more spacious.

It's also a versatile colour working in modern and traditional settings alike, and pairing effortlessly with a myriad of colours, including warm neutrals, soft muted greens and blues, as well as light grey," she adds.

picture of living room with butter yellow walls and furnishings

(Image credit: Sofa.com)

According to Helen, what really sets this particular shade apart is its timeless nature. She says that it never goes out of style and is a colour that will not date; instead, it will remain relevant as its appeal lies in the lasting sense of comfort and positivity it will bring to your everyday life.

There's a reason yellow is one of the happiest colours you can paint any room in your home, and this particular hue might be our favourite yet.

How can you get the butter yellow decor look in your home?

Unsurprisingly, there are so many ways you can introduce the butter yellow decor look into your interior design trend. Even if you're wanting to transform your living room on a budget, participating in this timeless trend needn't cost the earth.

"In spaces like bedrooms or living rooms, butter yellow can evoke a sense of tranquillity while still maintaining a light and joyful atmosphere. It’s a wonderful choice for areas where you want to inspire a sense of ease and connection, without overwhelming the senses," explains Lena Gierasinksa, head of product and displays at Barker and Stonehouse.

picture of chair and table with patterned yellow wallpaper

(Image credit: Hovia )

"In the living room, choose larger pieces of furniture like a sofa, accent chair or footstool in a butter yellow shade. This will uplift and enhance the space. Alternatively, choose a butter yellow rug. As the floor is the foundation of the space, it sets the tone for the entire room and a butter yellow rug has a grounding effect, gently adding colour to the home," she continues.

Alternatively, Lena suggests making your hallway look welcoming with butter yellow accessories. She recommends ceramic vases or plant pots dotted on shelves or a sideboard. This will add a little optimism to an often overlooked room in your home.

Simply adding these small touches of butter yellow will transform the space. However, you can also completely colour-drench your space with the hue, which would look just as fantastic.

With all the interior colour trends, it can be surprising how quickly a colour becomes popular, and butter yellow is no exception to that. Although we know it has warming, timeless properties, why is it taking the interior industry by storm?

"Yellow has long been associated with warmth, happiness and optimism. Butter yellow in particular strikes a balance between vibrancy and subtlety, which makes it easy to live with. It offers that mood lift we get from sunshine, but in a way that feels soft and calming," explains Catherine Jacob, Head of Design at Hovia.

"In today’s design landscape, people are gravitating toward colours that feel both comforting and joyful, and butter yellow delivers on both fronts," she adds.


If you're a butter yellow convert like us, there's no doubt that you'll also be a fan of the Amalfi decor trend. It has a more lemon-centric style and will have your home feeling like a sunny spot in the Mediterranean.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/homes-news/butter-yellow-decor-trend/ pJg8hykUVxg2LeS4r2pcmE Mon, 26 May 2025 12:30:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ Yes, Henry Vacuums still exist - their cordless model is actually really good ]]> The Henry is an iconic vacuum. It’s the one I remember seeing cleaners use in schools and hotels, so what happened when it comes to homes? That's where the Hetty Quick Cordless Vacuum appears. It's the retro brand's answer to domestic cleaning.

Pretty-in-pink, Hetty is a svelte, cordless, and really affordable vacuum. What’s not to love? I took her through all the same tests that I put the best vacuums —including Shark and Dyson — through. I think you’ll be pleased to know that this is a faithful, reliable friend to all homes.

Complete with a bag, reliable charge, and reasonable price tag, the Hetty Quick Cordless vacuum sounds like a dream come true, because that's exactly what she is. I took her for a spin. Here's how she fared.

Specifications

Hetty Quick Cordless Vacuum being tested in my home

(Image credit: Future)

DImensions

24 x 27 x 122 cm

Weight

3.2 kgs

Bin Capacity

1L

Run time

16-70 mins

Power

25.2 V

Charge time

90 mins

Unboxing

Hetty Quick Cordless Vacuum being tested in my home

(Image credit: Future)

The Hetty Cordless Vacuum comes complete with all the accessories you could ask for. There’s a bag pre-fitted in the canister, but you get a spare five to keep you going. If you're worries about these pods, you'll be pleased to know that they're offset by the brand and made from up to 65% recycled materials, so they end up being climate positive. Then, alongside your floorhead, you get a crevice and an upholstery tool, which store neatly on the vacuum handle. All of these are wrapped in paper, which brilliant. You can recycle everything that comes with the Hetty Quick. Both your bins and the environment will thank you for that.

The floorhead, stick, and motor all slot neatly together, clicking, very satisfyingly into place. You’ll need to charge the battery up before use, which takes about an hour. Yours might come with a little juice in it, but you’d be lucky if that’s the case. The charging itself is really inobtrusive — you just plug the battery in, so it’s very easy.

Who would it suit?

Hetty Quick Cordless Vacuum being tested in my home

(Image credit: Future)

First and foremost, the Hetty comes with a bag pre-fitted. This is pretty rare for a cordless vacuums and a relative godsend if you have allergies or if you don’t want to get your hands dirty when you’re shaking dust out of the motor. So, if you’re sensitive and you want a tight, squeaky clean cordless vacuum, this is perfect option.

The Hetty Quick is also really convenient. As a small, inexpensive vacuum, it makes the perfect model for flats, new homeowners, and small spaces. I used this in my urban flat for months and was very sad to see Hetty go. She does a wonderful job of quick run arounds.

As you'll see in the tests, Hetty is really good at light cleaning and lifting up dust and dirt from floors. She struggles to lift bigger dirt and debris without flinging it across the floor. This was more notable on my extreme review tests, but did persevere at home. You'd fix it by vacuuming over the same spot a few times — which I'd actually expect to have to do with a cheap vacuum — but it's important to note if you want a really powerful vacuum.

What is it like to use?

Hetty Quick Cordless Vacuum being tested in my home

(Image credit: Future)

Once I charged the Hetty up, I could start vacuuming. You can see that the top motor and bin is a really slim design. This makes it really nice to vacuum with: the body is lightweight and very nimble.

You get to control the speed from the control panel. This is a very simple '+' button that graduates up through speed settings. If you accidentally go past the one you want, you'll need to cycle back through them, but it's not a problem.

In spite of the slim design, the dust bin can collect 1 litre of dust and, if you run the vacuum on a low speed, you'll get up to 70 minutes of life from it. I can testify for this, as in the months that I used the Hetty for, I found that I rarely needed to go to any high speeds and so also didn't really need to charge the battery too often. It's really handy for quick runarounds.

Test 1: flour and sugar

Hetty Quick Cordless Vacuum being tested in my home

(Image credit: Future)

I sprinkle 100g of flour and sugar onto carpets, hard floors, and linoleum to see how well the Hetty Quick collected up finer particles. This emulates the dust and light spills that you might have on the floors in your home, so it's a great place to start.

Unlike most cheap vacuums, the Hetty Quick didn't track any flour or sugar in its wake. You can see in the image above that I got some impressive suction power from the Hetty, whipping up clean lines in the debris. It's a brilliant start.

Test 2: granola

Hetty Quick Cordless Vacuum being tested in my home

(Image credit: Future)

This next test was a little less successful. I scattered 100g of granola on the different floor types and, whilst the Hetty was brilliant at picking up granola clusters on the carpet, on hard floor the floorhead scattered them across the room and spat out oats in all directions. Granted, hard floors are hard at the best of times, and I served up quite a challenge, but this wasn't ideal. It didn't take many passes and run arounds to clean up after myself, but there were other vacuums that managed to pick everything up in one pass. It's what you get when you opt for a model that's a little cheaper.

In my longer-term tests, I didn't struggle as much with this issue. It's mostly because it's very rare that you'll empty 100g of cereal onto the floor to vacuum up — it's an extreme task to set. It did still spit and scatter some debris, but not in a way that I would find intolerable if I used this.

Test 3: hair and whole home cleaning

Hetty Quick Cordless Vacuum being tested in my home

(Image credit: Future)

I have long hair and a dog, which means that there's a lot of strands lying around my house. To make the last tougher for the Hetty Quick Cordless Vacuum, I scattered hair extensions around the house to see whether they would get caught in the rollers.

I thought this would be the toughest task for the Hetty, but, as the picture demonstrates, there was hardly a strand caught up. All the scattered pieces lifted off the carpet and into the dust bag. Combined with the fact that this has a bag, the Hetty makes a brilliant case for being the best vacuum for allergy sufferers who want something light and quick to clean with.

Cleaning and maintenance

Hetty Quick Cordless Vacuum being tested in my home

(Image credit: Future)

Having cleaned the whole house, I'd given the Hetty Quick Cordless a real run for her money. The 1-litre dust bin, surprisingly didn't need emptying very often. I only replaced the bag once on my first day of testing and that was through vacuuming hair extensions, granola, flour, sugar, and a family home.

The battery life promises up to 70 minutes of vacuuming, especially if you are conservative with your speed and, unlike some other vacuums, it was true to its word. I made my way through all of our tests, and vacuumed the whole house multiple times before the battery needed changing. It's a nice change.

How does it compare?

Hetty Quick Cordless Vacuum being tested in my home

(Image credit: Future)

The Hetty Quick Cordless falls firmly into the bracket of cordless vacuums that are good value, perfect if you want a small, inexpensive solution for quick jobs in compact homes. The comparison that always springs to mind is between the Hetty and the Shark vacuum that I'm currently testing, the Shark PowerPro Cordless Vacuum, which costs almost exactly the same amount, if not about £20-30 more.

Whilst the Shark isn't bagged (not ideal for allergy sufferers), this can stand up independently; has a flex in the floorhead, so it can reach easily under sofas; and can automatically adjust to different floor types. This means that it ups the ante compared to the Hetty, taking the edge on performance. The down side is that the dust bin is bigger and, therefore, less elegant to store and tuck away. Both are brilliant for their price: Hetty is better for allergies and super-clean vacuuming, whilst the Shark has more power.

Should you buy it?

Hetty Quick Cordless Vacuum being tested in my home

(Image credit: Future)

If you want an inexpensive, reliable vacuum for speedy run arounds the Hetty Quick Cordless is perfect. You'd struggle to get the same size, bagged, cordless vacuum around this price point. I'm pleased to see that the retro Henry has found a way to work its magic in our homes still.

How we test

Hetty Quick Cordless Vacuum being tested in my home

(Image credit: Future)

At woman&home, we have a series of tests that we put every vacuum through so that we can compare all the best models to help you to find the perfect one for you. I cover all the different types of dust and debris that you might find on your floor, from fine particles of flour and sugar, through to long strands of hair as well as clusters of granola. I'll assess how well these are picked up by the vacuum, but I'll also talk about charge, how easy the vacuum is to hold, as well as how nimble it is. By the end of my review, you should know everything that you would need to before making a purchase. If you still have questions, don't hesitate to email me. I'm always happy to talk about vacuums.

To find out more, you can see how we test vacuums on our dedicated page.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/yes-henry-hoovers-still-exist-their-cordless-model-is-actually-really-good/ LatK3PnumPPFsYrhXenYtX Mon, 26 May 2025 05:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ Can an air purifier help with dust? Appliance specialists reveal all ]]> Keeping your home dust-free can feel like a never-ending challenge, especially when you've got pets and a busy household. Could your air purifier be the helping hand you need?

Getting rid of dust in your home isn't always as easy as keeping up with your daily cleaning habits. Sometimes the dust can feel overwhelming, and even when you regularly clean, the air can be filled with dust particles.

This is not only a pain for those looking to keep their home clean and tidy, but also a big problem for allergy sufferers. But can you reduce dust with an air purifier the same way it helps with allergies? We spoke to appliance experts to find out.

Can an air purifier help with dust?

Having one of the best air purifiers on your side can make a huge difference to the way you feel in your home. It can help improve the air quality of your space and has even been found to help relieve allergy symptoms.

But can it help reduce the amount of dust in your home?

"A good air purifier can help to reduce dust levels in your home, though it’s impossible to get rid of dust entirely," explains Katie Lilywhite, air treatment expert at AO.com. "These appliances draw in airborne dust particles and trap them using a series of filters."

The filters, like HEPA ones, are designed to capture fine particles such as dead skin cells, pollen, textile fibres, pet dander, and even dust mite waste. An air purifier is ideal for dealing with dust, but it cannot eliminate it entirely," she continues.

To assist your air purifier, we recommend avoiding common dusting mistakes, increasing the frequency of your vacuuming, and using a traditional duster regularly.

picture of airbourne dust in room

(Image credit: Getty Images)

Where should I put my air purifier for dust?

To help reduce the dust in your home, the placement of your air purifier will make a difference, similar to where you put a dehumidifier. Placing it in certain spots in your home will ensure it collects more dust.

"Placing your air purifier is an important step to maximising dust trapping power. Try placing your air purifier on a table, shelf or stand as dust tends to float around chest to head height," explains Katie.

"Keep this as centrally as possible to the room and avoid corners or walls, as they may hinder your appliance’s airflow. Also, should you know if one room is dustier than another – that’s the first place to run it," she adds.

FAQs

Why is my room still dusty with an air purifier?

Even when you clean the house as often as you should, dust can seem like it's coming out of nowhere. And when you've got an air purifier running, what does it mean when it's still dusty?

"Once a dust particle has landed on a surface, the air purifier will not be able to do anything with it; you will have to get out your duster," says Chris Michael, Co-Founder of Meaco.

He continues, "To capture more dust whilst it is in the air, you need to do a combination of running the air purifier for longer, and running it at a higher fan speed so that more air from the room (and therefore more dust) passes through the filter each hour."

picture of dust on wooden table in home

(Image credit: Getty Images)

Why is my air purifier not collecting dust?

Should you have noticed that your air purifier isn't performing as well as it usually does, there are a few potential reasons why.

"If your air purifier has stopped collecting dust, then its filter might be full. Be sure to consult your appliance’s manual – most filters will last between six and twelve months, but this depends on how often you’re running your air purifier," explains Katie.

Alternatively, she warns that you could also be using the wrong filter type. She says, "Not all air purifiers use HEPA filters, and if yours is a basic mesh filter, then it won’t trap fine dust particles efficiently."

Finally, Katie points out that if you run your purifier on quiet mode, it may impact its ability to capture dust. This is because the speed of the fan might be too low, and therefore most dust won't be captured. She recommends upping the speed or ditching quiet mode altogether.

What is the best air purifier for dust?

In the same way, you'd invest in the best dehumidifier to deal with a damp problem; the better the air purifier, the more dust is collected.

Katie says, "HEPA filter air purifiers stand out as the ideal appliance for tackling dust. Be on the lookout for an air purifier suitable for larger areas, as they will be able to handle heavier loads without the need for replacement."


If you're looking for even more backup with the air quality in your home, why not try picking up some of the best houseplants for air purifying? They don't cost anything to run and can make a huge difference in keeping your household breathing healthy air.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/can-an-air-purifier-help-with-dust-advice/ 4tA9QGTKkDk5qtD6hbUHua Sun, 25 May 2025 14:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ Simply plug-in and start cooking, this portable induction hob is a bargain ]]> The VonShef Dual Induction Hob is a little fiddly to master. The LED display is bright and easy to read, but the controls are not intuitive. However, once you get used to the quirks, you will discover a powerful portable hob that would be great for those after a temporary additional cooking space. It’s reasonably priced and comes with a two-year warranty.

This hob has some nifty features, and unlike some of the other best induction hobs, has an integrated timer, lock function and a smart sharp-edged design, giving the hob a slender look. However, this model is deceptively large and too big to fit in a kitchen cupboard. It has two cooking plates and a max power of 2800W, and can accommodate large pots. Although powerful for the price, it was less impressive when handling lower temperatures, and a more gentle setting would be a useful addition. It was very good at distributing an even heat and responsive to temperature adjustments.

I did some tests to put this induction hob through its paces: although it struggled to make a chocolate sauce, it did produce perfectly evenly cooked pancakes. Depending on what you’re looking for, this might be the hob for you!

VonShef Dual Induction Hob

Testing the VonShef Dual Induction Hob

(Image credit: Future)

RRP

£89.99

Dimensions (D/W/H)

37cm/59cm/7.2cm

Number of rings

2

Heat settings

200-2800W

Power

2800W

Returns period

30 days from dispatch date (the return cost is not covered)

Guarantee

two year warranty

Unboxing the VonShef Dual Induction Hob

Testing the VonShef Dual Induction Hob

The packaging (Image credit: Future)

The VonShef Dual Induction Hob is delivered in a cardboard box with polystyrene padding. Delivery takes 1-3 working days, or next-day delivery is available for a fee in the UK mainland.

It was simple to set up as it just requires plugging in and is ready to use. However, you may wish to consult the manual before you start cooking, I found the controls a little confusing.

The quality seems a touch flimsy, but it has a 2-year warranty to cover you if anything goes wrong.

Who would the VonShef Dual Induction Hob suit?

Testing the VonShef Dual Induction Hob

Turning on the induction hob (Image credit: Future)

The VonShef Dual Induction Hob would suit someone with a larger kitchen space looking for an occasional additional cooking area. This model is too large to fit in a standard kitchen cabinet. Therefore, it wouldn’t be suitable for compact kitchens where the intention would be to put the hob away between uses.

It could also work well as a temporary solution or in a space that needs a hob for light use, such as a kitchenette. It’s certainly much cheaper than installing an induction hob. The cable is just over one metre long, so it needs to be positioned close to a socket. The angular design creates an illusion that the hob is flat on the surface, so it looks more like a built-in hob than other models, great if you want it to look like a permanent fixture.

What is the VonShef Dual Induction Hob like to use?

Testing the VonShef Dual Induction Hob

Using the hob (Image credit: Future)

Reviews from customers on the VonShef website mentioned the buttons being an issue. I also found them hard to use; they didn’t always respond when pressed. However, after a little use, I mastered the jabbing action required to activate them.

I was also confused by the display, although the bright LED display is easy to read, there are two ways to control the cooking power, and I’m still not sure what the difference is. Both seem to adjust the power, one with controls ranging from 200 to 2800W, the other from 60 to 240˚C.

I was able to use the VonShef Dual Induction Hob on my wooden countertop without the risk of damaging it as the cooling fan is powerful. However, this means it’s excessively loud when in use (and for about 50 seconds after it’s turned off). On full power, the fan noise reached 60Db (a noise sufficient to breathe a sign of relief when it stops whirring). Another mildly frustrating factor was that when the hob doesn’t have a pan on it, the control panel flashes, even if you’re using the other hob.

A useful feature is the timer, which can be set for up to 180 minutes. However, it seemed to reset when the other settings were changed and turns off after a single beep, so probably most useful for short stints where you intend to stay close by. It also has a lock function that you can engage while the hob is on so you don't accidentally change the settings.

The power is max 2800W, which is shared across both plates - so only one can be on max at a time. Which is good for a portable induction hob in this price range. It can accommodate induction pans size 12cm-26cm.

Test 1: Bringing water to the boil

Testing the VonShef Dual Induction Hob

Boiling water test (Image credit: Future)

To test the efficiency of the transfer of heat I timed how long it took to bring one litre of water to a rapid boil. At the maximum power setting it took 3 minutes 45 seconds, which is quite rapid.

The VonShef Dual Induction Hob has a max wattage of 2800W. Many built-in induction hobs are more powerful and have a boost setting for boiling water. But this still seemed faster than using my built-in electric hob. Of course, the time this takes will depend on the efficiency of the pan used.

It was impressive that this hob kept constant power and didn’t cycle on and off as some cheaper and older models do. This would be useful if you need to keep a consistent high heat, for example, when searing meat.

Test 2: Simmering chocolate or sauce

Testing the VonShef Dual Induction Hob

A smooth chocolate sauce was easy to achieve. (Image credit: Future)

To test how successfully the hob can hold a low steady temperature, I made a chocolate sauce. Chocolate is a delicate ingredient; if overheated, it will burn and the sauce will split. The lowest setting on the VonShef Dual Induction Hob is 200W. To make the sauce I melted 50g of chocolate and 50g milk together in a pan with the hob set to the lowest setting. If the chocolate melts slowly, it will emulsify with the warming milk to make a smooth sauce. Unfortunately, even at the lowest setting, the VonShef hob was too powerful. The milk boiled very quickly, and the chocolate burnt in the pan.

It would be possible to keep a sauce warm without it catching in the pan by using a bain marie. However, not being able to gently heat things would be frustrating. For example, I used the lowest setting to melt butter, but the high temperature caused it to splatter and bubble, making a mess.

Test 3: Cooking pancakes

Testing the VonShef Dual Induction Hob

The pancake cooked in the VonShef Dual Induction Hob was evenly browned. (Image credit: Future)

To asses the hob’s transfer of heat and how evenly it cooks I made pancakes. It’s possible to see a visual representation of the distribution of heat by looking at the browning of the pancake. This is where this model excelled. The pancakes were evenly browned all over, showing that it is good at even cooking. When adjusting the heat, the hob responded quickly.

Portability and storage

Testing the VonShef Dual Induction Hob

(Image credit: Future)

The VonShef Dual Induction Hob weighs 4.4kg and is easy to pick up and move. The size is easy to handle. However, the width is 59cm, which is too large to fit in a standard kitchen cabinet and requires a large counter space.

The power cord is 110cm long, so if your sockets are on the floor, it will need to be positioned close to a socket. For countertop power, you will have a little more flexibility.

It doesn’t come with anything for storage other than the cardboard box.

Cleaning

Testing the VonShef Dual Induction Hob

(Image credit: Future)

This induction hob was easy to wipe clean. Due to the high gloss of the ceramic plates and dark colour, dust and grease marks are very visible, but the flat surface is easy to wipe clean. I suggest first wiping and then using a microfibre polishing cloth. There are a few crevices around the control panel and the plates that, over time, may collect grime and require the attention of a cocktail stick to clean them.

How does the VonShef Dual Induction Hob compare?

Testing the VonShef Dual Induction Hob

(Image credit: Future)

The IKEA Tillreda Portable Induction Hob is a similar model. It’s around the same price and power and would be more suitable for those with a small kitchen looking for a hob that can be put away. The IKEA model is also better for cooking at a lower temperature. If space is an issue, VonShef also sell a single hob version with a similar design that’s cheaper and more compact. The VonShef Single Induction Hob is slightly less powerful and half the price.

If you are after a more powerful portable induction hob for regular use that could work in a professional setting Buffalo are a good brand, the Buffalo Heavy Duty Double Induction Hob 7kW has two burners like this one, but at eight time the price of the VonShef Dual Induction Hob it’s considerably more expensive.

Should you buy the VonShef Dual Induction Hob?

Testing the VonShef Dual Induction Hob

(Image credit: Future)

The VonShef Dual Induction Hob would be good for those who require a temporary hob or an alternative to a built-in hob for light use. It’s competitively priced and comes with a long warranty. The neat design is easy to wipe clean, and it’s lightweight, so it's easy to move around. If budget allows, you may wish to opt for a more powerful model, but I would for the price and a temporary solution, this does the job.

How we test

Testing the VonShef Dual Induction Hob

(Image credit: Future)

At woman&home, we like to test every portable induction hob that we recommend to you. It's important that our tests cover the versatility and everyday use cases for the hob, but we also need consistency across the board so that we can compare between different models.

All of our portable induction hob reviews are carried out by experts, namely the woman&home food team. That's because the portable induction hobs get a lot of use on a whole range of recipes. They're also the experts when it comes to cooking and they'll pick up on nuances that other people might take longer to notice.

We have a whole page dedicated to how we test portable induction hobs, but if you want a mini tour of what we test, we have three core tasks. The first is boiling water, where we use water from the tap at 22C and the same pan with the lid off. We set the hobs to the highest setting and then time how long it takes for water to boil. This is really a power test. Next, we will simmer sauce or melt chocolate to test the induction hob's ability to be gentle. For the Tillreda, we made chocolate sauce from 50g of dark chocolate and 50g cold milk, at the lowest setting. The last test is pancakes, because this will show us how evenly heat is distributed across the pan from the portable induction hob. They're simple, but very telling tests.

You'll spot that we also talk about cleaning, packaging, value for money, and we'll offer up comparisons too. That way, you'll get a really clear idea of what the portable induction hob is like to use and whether it's the perfect one for you.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/vonshef-dual-induction-hob-review/ qeSkMCjmvPZC3WFrAKeUhc Sun, 25 May 2025 10:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ What's the stylish way to stay cool at home? Why not ask Shark and this iconic British designer ]]>

Available in a modern Charcoal finish, the £249.99 TurboBlade is a design-led solution that meets the growing demand for home appliances that are both functional and visually striking.View Deal

What happens when the biggest innovators in home appliances team up with iconic British designer, Henry Holland? Something close to magic, just a lot cooler.

Shark have announced the launch of their new TurboBlade Multi-Directional Cooling Fan and it couldn't have come sooner. Complete with 360 degree rotation, a sleek blade design, and a special function that feels like a natural breeze, this is one appliance that promises to keep you cool in the heat.

I was lucky enough to snatch some time with the fan, as well as with Henry Holland and the faces behind Shark's innovative designs. So, if you want to shoot the breeze with Henry Holland, here are his exclusive tips for staying cool in style as well as all the details about the new Shark TurboBlade.

What you need to know about the Shark TurboBlade Multi-Directional Cooling Fan

Shark Turbo Blade Fan on a stand

(Image credit: Future)

The Shark TurboBlade is a sleek, bladeless fan that redefines what a household cooling appliance can be. Designed with 360-degree cooling coverage, the TurboBlade pivots, twists, and oscillates to direct airflow wherever it's needed, while remaining impressively quiet. And, having seen many in person, I have to say, it's not quite like anything else. The arms are slim and slick, moonlighting as a sculptural silhouette rather than your classic, boxy white fan.

You'll enjoy ten different speed settings, as well as a quiet Sleep Mode (with muted chimes, dim lights, and a fan setting called AirBlanket Mode that promises horizontal, widespread cooling power for when you're sleeping). Its telescoping pole also adjusts in height to suit different settings—whether you're lounging, working out, or sleeping. And, finally, you've got the Natural Breeze mode, which emulates organic wind patterns, as if you had a window open in your home. Gorgeous.

Shark Turbo Blade Fan remote

(Image credit: Future)

In addition to its elegant design, the TurboBlade delivers exceptional performance. Its multi-directional arms project air up to 20 meters in Boost mode. I sat in a sunlit room with one of these going and I could feel refreshing wafts of air coming across the table towards my face. It was a big conference room and a hot day. Just imagine what this could do in a home.

There's also special DustDefence technology that helps maintain peak performance, trapping the big bits of dust that might blow across the floor and sit inside your fan to be blown back across the room when it's running. They've really thought about everything.

Shark Turbo Blade Fan controls

(Image credit: Future)

The fan is completely remote controlled. You turn it off and on using the station and then the nifty remote lets you choose fan speeds, temperatures and settings. "We wanted to go for something simple," says SVP of New Product Development, Tom Bennett. "We didn't want people faffing and fiddling with apps when they wanted cold air. This is a press and go appliance."

Available in a modern Charcoal finish, the £249.99 TurboBlade is a design-led solution that meets the growing demand for home appliances that are both functional and visually striking.View Deal

What did Henry Holland do with the Shark TurboBlade Multi-Directional Cooling Fan?

Shark Turbo Blade Fan at home

(Image credit: Future)

So what's Henry Holland got to do with all this? Well, the launch of the Shark TurboBlade has been a collaboration between the British designer and ceramicist and Shark. When I saw Holland demonstrating the fan, he was describing how much he loves products that "bring joy to the everyday. It's how I've approached my fashion, ceramics, and interiors and this is another great way to explore it."

Holland describes how appliances are graudally becoming becoming instagrammable. "Fans have never really looked this good have they? I remember those white cage fans that kept you up all night," Holland laughs, "but this is a fan that's got beautiful design, form, and function down. And, as an allergy sufferer, I was really pleased to hear about the DustDefence at the back."

When asked how he would style it in a space he said, "I love textures at home and this is a great place to start. The TurboBlade are these stunning metallic blades on a pedestal in a gorgeous charcoal colour. It's success being handed to you."

How Henry Holland recommends keeping cool in style this summer?

Shark TurboBlade Fan

(Image credit: Shark)

As summer heats up, keeping your home cool can be as much about smart styling as it is about airflow. Henry Holland shares his top tips for beating the heat without sacrificing style, starting with texture: “Beat the heat with natural textures like linen, rattan, and terracotta,” he says, noting that these breathable materials “evoke a summer calm.” Lighting also plays a role—he advises ditching harsh overheads in favour of soft, indirect lighting to “create a cooler atmosphere and add mood without adding heat.” When it comes to decorating, less is more: “Declutter surfaces and choose key standout pieces that really connect,” Holland suggests. He also recommends rearranging your space to promote airflow, repositioning furniture near windows or breezy spots to “allow cross-ventilation to do its thing.” Finally, make your cooling appliances work harder stylistically—Holland champions “statement pieces that double as décor,” such as ceramic vases, shapely side tables, and bold fans like Shark’s new TurboBlade, which blends sculptural simplicity with powerful, quiet performance.


Shark Turbo Blade Fan on a stand

(Image credit: Future)

The gift of style, simplicity, and an icy cool breeze doesn't come around often, which is why the Shark TurboBreeze is such a treat. They're available at plenty of retailers, but let me get my hands on one first. I'll be fuming if they sell out.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/homes-news/shark-turboblade-multi-directional-cooling-fan-launch/ F8rGe7JibPhDpH7rwm6M5Z Sun, 25 May 2025 05:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ This hand mixer feels like cheating - it's compact, powerful, and only £40 ]]> I’ve been more than impressed with all of Kenwood’s latest releases, not in the least their new hand mixer. Designed with busy, crammed kitchens in mind, the Kenwood has clever storage, unrivalled power, and a smart design, I can see the Kenwood QuickMix GO being a hit in a lot of kitchens.

As people migrate from stand mixers over to hand mixers, I’ve seen lots of people on the hunt for the best hand mixers. There are plenty of people offering up models for the top spot, but nobody has done storage and design as smartly as Kenwood.

The QuickMix GO is packed with useful, well-considered features that make the Kenwood one of the best models I’ve tested.. The cherry on top is that it’s reasonably priced too.

Specifications

Kenwood GO Hand Mixer

(Image credit: Kenwood)

RRP

£39

Dimensions

H18.50 x W20.80 x D8.90cm

Weight

1.03 kgs

Cord length

1.5m

Power

350 watts

Speed settings

5

Colour options

Storm blue, clay red

Accessories

Hand mixer, stainless steel tools (whisks and dough hooks), measuring scoop (tsp/tbsp), carry case

Guarantee

2 years

Unboxing

Kenwood GO Hand Mixer unboxed

(Image credit: Future)

Kenwood is brilliant with their packaging. The compact box that this arrives in feels almost too small to house a hand mixer and yet, out of the box, you pull dough hooks, beaters, a whisk, and a storage lid. This clever design lets you keep all the accessories together and in what is effectively a box, whilst also making things tidy.

You can buy the Kenwood in storm blue or rose pink both of which are versatile colourways. The finish doesn’t show up splatters and fingerprints, which is useful, so you get the benefits of a product that is both pretty and practical with the Kenwood.

I like to check the sustainability of an appliance too and this comes in an all-paper wrap with a fully recyclable box. It’s a small touch, but it tells you that this is a quality product coming from a brand that really cares and thinks about their appliances. Trust me, I’ve seen this time and time again.

Who would it suit?

Storage in the Kenwood GO Hand Mixer

(Image credit: Future)

I’ve been told that Kenwood designed their hand mixer for modern, urban living spaces. That’s why you have the super space-efficient storage options and sleek design. Whilst it is, undeniably, a brilliant option if you’re short on space or if your kitchen is already brimming with accessories, there is more.

The Kenwood QuickMix GO is a brilliant option if you’re not looking to spend a lot of money on a special brand, but if you also want good quality. Calling it a budget option under sells how well made this is. It’s a reliable product that makes for a good investment — you’ll get plenty of use out of it as well as a robust hand mixer, so it should last you a long while too.

So it’s brilliant for small spaces and savvy shoppers as a general theme. Whilst it flew through my tests, it’s worth noting that this isn’t perhaps as nuanced as more sophisticated hand mixers. You don’t have as many speed settings or power controls, but that shouldn’t be a problem for anyone, unless you are a keel baker that’s looking for precision versatility.

What is it like to use?

Controls on the Kenwood GO Hand Mixer

(Image credit: Future)

True to Kenwood’s reputation, the QuickMix GO is really easy to use. You have five speed settings that you can flick through on the top of the hand mixer. You’ve got a lot of space between the handle and the main body of the machine, which makes gripping onto it very easy. I used this for long periods of time in testing and didn’t find it strenuous on my hand or wrist, which is a real result.

Test 1: cake

Cake mix made with Kenwood GO Hand Mixer

(Image credit: Future)

The best basic test for any hand mixer is how well it makes cake mix. For this, the Kenwood QuickMix GO needs to cream butter and sugar together and then gradually incorporate my flour and eggs. It’s a test of textures and versatility that the QuickMix GO flew through. It took less than a minute for me to be happy with the fluffy, light texture of my butter and sugar, even though the butter hadn’t softened as much as it should have before I tested the Kenwood. Then, the slow start on the hand mixer kept any flour from getting blown into a big cloud in the air when I was adding it into the bowl.

I ran some more tests throughout the week, mixing buttercream icing and cookie dough with the QuickMix GO and each result was just as impressive as the last. If you’re a baker that wants a helping hand in the mixing and beating department, this is the one for you.

Test 2: bread dough

Kenwood GO Hand Mixer kneading dough

(Image credit: Future)

Bread dough is a tough one for hand mixers, because it takes a lot of strength to work through and that can be pretty tiring to support. As you can see, it was no trouble for the Kenwood QuickMix GO. I could bring together the flour, water, and yeast really nicely and still knead it well, but I would recommend getting your hands involved too. This bowl in the image above is the result of some hand kneading too as the dough hooks were moving quite slowly through the dough and I wanted to get my bread mix together. It did the messy bit of bringing together the wet and dry ingredients, but it’s no substitute for a stand mixer.

Test 3: whipped cream

Kenwood GO Hand Mixer whipping cream

(Image credit: Future)

This light, simple task is perfect for the Kenwood QuickMix GO. You can see that I whipped up cream into stiff peaks in under two minutes. I had the whisk running for two minutes on its top speed and it wasn’t too noisy, nor did I get a lot of feedback or resistance. The cream was perfectly whipped, smooth, and light as air. As far as scores go, the Kenwood QuickMix GO gets top marks.

Cleaning

Kenwood GO Hand Mixer accessories

(Image credit: Future)

All the attachments for the Kenwood are dishwasher safe, so you can simply put them in your machine and let it clean up. Alternatively, you can easily wash them by hand — it was no trouble for me at all.

The plastic casing on the Kenwood is also easy to wipe down and you’ll likely want to if you’ve got your hands sticky baking. Again, it’s an easy job, so you won’t want to skip it.

How does it compare?

Whipped cream made in the KitchenAid Hand Mixer

(Image credit: Future)

As a budget, space-savvy hand mixer, the Kenwood QuickMix GO is unbeatable. However, if you’re ready to graduate onto something more sophisticated, I have to recommend the KitchenAid 9-Speed Hand Mixer.

The KitchenAid comes with another four speed settings, so you get a little more nuance in power. It’s also better at brining together bread dough and absorbing some of the feedback, making for a much nicer baking experience. You’ve got colour options, a premium image, and impressive performance. It’s not necessary unless you’re an avid baker, but is nonetheless nice to have the option of using.

Should you buy it?

Kenwood GO Hand Mixer propped on the counter

(Image credit: Future)

If you need a space-savvy option and you’re shopping on a budget, you can’t do better than the Kenwood QuickMix Go. It’s a handy, speedy, effective accessory that will go down as a kitchen must-have.

How we test

Kenwood GO Hand Mixer on the counter

(Image credit: Future)

At woman&home, we put all of our hand mixers through rigorous tests. Each attachment gets an assigned task: the beaters make cake batter, whisks whip cream, and dough hooks make bread dough. I repeat these tests over time to get a sense of how good the hand mixer is in the long-term as well as on the first day that I use it. I also make notes on what the hand mixer is like to clean, how it compares to other models on the market, and I'll let you know anything else that makes the hand mixer stand out from the rest.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/kenwood-quickmix-go-hand-mixer-review/ Bh3AdAHD99zU8deZzrZioB Sat, 24 May 2025 10:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ How to get rid of greenfly: 4 simple methods for a pest-free summer ]]> Although summer is a joyful mix of warm evenings, sizzling BBQs, and time spent sunbathing in the garden, it also brings with it flies. And more specifically, greenflies.

In the same way, you'll start wondering why there are suddenly lots of tiny black flies in your home, greenflies tend to turn up out of nowhere in spring, swarming homes and gardens. They cling to clothes, can damage your indoor plants and are generally just a nuisance.

But what can you do with a pest problem that affects most of the country? Well, you can control the amount you come across in your home with a few of these recommended methods.

How to get rid of greenflies: 4 natural methods

It's hard to enjoy your outdoor living room when you're constantly being attacked by annoying greenflies. Whether they're landing on your clothes, in your hair, or, god forbid, in your food, it's never a fun experience.

Once the weather starts picking up, it can seem like there are more flies than ever, which is when you'll want to have some of these effective methods in your back pocket.

1. Embrace natural deterrents

Whether you're looking to get rid of rats from your garden or stop ants from entering your home, some natural deterrents are the most effective solution.

"Homemade deterrents can also be made using essential oils like peppermint, rosemary or cloves. Another simple option is a spray solution of washing-up liquid and water, which can help deter the flies, but not harm plants," explains Adam Juson, co-founder of commercial pest control company Merlin Environmental.

Simply spray these around your garden and the windows and doors of your home to deter the flies from your space.

2. Encourage natural predators

picture of marigolds in field

(Image credit: Getty Images)

Aside from sprays and oils, there is a more convenient way of keeping your garden fly-free and looking good, too.

"You can also encourage natural predators like ladybirds, hoverflies and lacewings into your space by planting flowers like marigold and calendula," suggests Adam.

Marigolds are fantastic companion plants as they offer protection from pests that don't like their unique scent. And they do all this whilst bringing a pop of colour to your garden.

3. Invest in insect mesh

One of the very best ways of keeping flies out of your house is to buy a physical fly screen for your doors, windows and any accessible vents.

"A fine insect mesh acts as a physical barrier, stopping greenflies from entering your home while allowing fresh air to flow freely," recommends Dan Hancock, managing director at Mesh Direct.

"As greenflies are particularly small, opt for an extra fine insect mesh to stop even these minuscule invaders from slipping through."

4. Maintain a clean environment

picture of woman wiping down counter top

(Image credit: Getty Images)

Keeping your house clean is beneficial for many reasons, but one of them is that the cleaner your house is, the fewer pests will be drawn to it.

"Although greenflies are more attracted to plants than kitchens, it's still important to keep your home tidy," says Dan. "Avoid bringing infested plants indoors and check your garden regularly for early signs of greenfly colonies, especially on the undersides of leaves and tender new growth."

It's important to flood any outdoor plants you're bringing inside and prune any affected plants to properly prevent any spreading. That and sticking to your daily cleaning habits will keep the green flies at bay for a little longer.

FAQs

Why are there so many greenflies?

Luckily, greenflies, along with many other pests, are only around during the warmer months. However, some years there seems to be more around than usual.

"Greenflies are attracted to soft and new plant growth, especially in warm conditions. The rising temperatures we’re currently experiencing mean you might have seen more bugs around. Greenfly populations can also increase quickly as they rapidly reproduce and have few predators," explains Ryan.

So whilst you're sorting the garden out this summer, just be prepared to be covered in greenflies.

picture of green flies outside in a small swarm

(Image credit: Getty Images)

What is the best way to get rid of greenflies?

If you want to enjoy your meadowscape garden in peace this spring and summer, then there are some things you can do to lower the greenfly population.

"Early detection and manual removal are the best methods. Regularly inspect plants and remove small infestations by hand or water blast them," advises Robert Collins, pest control expert at MyJobQuote.co.uk.

He adds, "For larger infestations, thoroughly spray affected plants with insecticidal soap or neem oil, ensuring contact with the aphids. Also, encourage natural predators as this is the most sustainable and long-term solution."

Where do greenfly lay eggs?

"Greenfly typically don’t lay eggs in the traditional sense during the growing season," explains Robert. "Most aphid species reproduce asexually and will give birth to live young directly onto the underside of leaves or on tender stems."

During autumn, some greenfly species will lay small oval eggs on host plants for overwintering, which means it's a good idea to check your plants before winter and treat them with neem oil should you find these eggs. Neem oil will help stop the growth of the eggs and also deter any more flies from setting up shop on your indoor plants.


Tidying your garden and removing any dying plants or rotten organic matter will make a huge difference in keeping greenflies and other pests away. You might even need to put your homemade compost in a sealed bin, too, as the smells coming from it could attract even more flies.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/how-to-get-rid-of-greenfly-expert-advice/ BTRYpoGPXtD955KeQjZ3iZ Sat, 24 May 2025 05:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ Talking trees, Japanese moss mounds and slow gardening – these are my RHS Chelsea Flower Show 2025 highlights ]]> Earlier this week, I had the pleasure of attending the RHS Chelsea Flower Show to meet garden designers and explore their masterful garden showcases.

The RHS Chelsea Flower Show is the pinnacle of garden events, the greatest of all the shows to discover glorious garden trends and inspiration to transform outdoor spaces of all sizes.

My RHS Chelsea Flower Show highlights demonstrate how garden design is changing and evolving. Aside from admiring The King's Rose this year, I found myself captivated by the powerful messages behind many of the show gardens, each with a heartfelt message to help preserve nature in all its forms.

RHS Chelsea Flower Show highlights 2025: key design elements

While all the gardens are enormously inspiring, I found myself particularly drawn to the following aspects of landscaping, sensory garden design and underlying environmental themes that feel significant for how we will be designing gardens for the future.

Cha No Niwa – Japanese Tea Garden

Compilation garden images to show RHS Chelsea garden Show 2025 highlights

The simply stunning Japanese Tea Garden (Image credit: Tamara Kelly)

The immaculate landscaping was truly breathtaking in this garden, it was undoubtedly one of my favourites. Designed by Kazuyuki Ishihara, it was immediately clear to see why it was awarded a Gold medal in excellence.

Celebrating traditional Japanese garden ideas, the display was a masterful fusion of tonal Acer trees, raked gravel and incredible mounds of moss that added a touch of whimsy to the picture-perfect planting. Designed to be "a place for quiet reflection, to be immersed within the beauty of nature and be inspired by its living art," this garden was a stunningly serene space.

As detailed on the RHS site, "the planting includes trees commonly seen in the landscapes of Japanese satoyama (countryside), including Acer palmatum, Enkianthus perulatus, Iris, Sedum, Hornbeam and Pachysandra terminalis."

Avanade Intelligent Garden

Compilation garden images to show RHS Chelsea garden Show 2025 highlights

(Image credit: Tamara Kelly)

Designed by Tom Massey and Je Ahn, this gold medal-winning garden was resoundingly the most impressive in terms of showcasing how technology is being used to change the landscape of gardening.

Using a range of sensors, the garden was connected to allow the team to demonstrate how smart tech can help 'talk' to the trees and plants to gauge their needs, to 'learn what specific care they need and how they feel.'

Working with Microsoft to explore how technology like AI, this futuristic garden intelligently tracks tree health, monitoring growth, water levels, soil types and conditions and weather patterns. AI is able to analyse the data and offer advice to ensure optimal care. It was mind-blowing to see how far smart tech has come.

The aim of the Avanade Intelligent Garden is to spark a conversation around the future of urban trees as they face increasing challenges due to climate change and modern living.

The Addleshaw Goddard Freedom To Flourish Garden

Compilation garden images to show RHS Chelsea garden Show 2025 highlights

The 'slow garden' designed by Joe and Laura Carey (Image credit: Tamara Kelly)

Exuding the same sense of charm that comes from the rewilding garden trend, this unhurried garden oasis was laidback, relaxed, but stunning nonetheless.

Inspired by a Norfolk colloquialism, this garden was a creative interpretation of nature's call to embrace a slower pace of life to enjoy stillness and calm. Yes please.

"Nature is never in a hurry, yet everything is accomplished", a reminder that creativity flourishes in stillness. not haste. In the busy, fast-paced world we live in, this was a refreshing message to 'stop and smell the roses.'

"Layered gabions draw inspiration from eroding cliffs, a subtle reminder of the delicate balance required to protect rest in an increasingly busy world," say the team at Carey Garden Design Studio. "The naturalistic planting scheme is inspired by wildflowers in the landscape of North Norfolk."

Hospitalfield Arts Garden

Compilation garden images to show RHS Chelsea garden Show 2025 highlights

The sand dune-inspired garden designed by Nigel Dunnett (Image credit: Tamara Kelly)

This striking garden was like a slice of escapism, instantly transporting me from the fields of Chelsea to the rural sand dunes of Arbroath on the Scottish east coast.

The planting has the "qualities of the robust and resilient dune vegetation," says the designer Nigel Dunnett. "It is very textural, with grey-blue-green grasses forming a matrix within which colourful flowering plants can perform.

"Pine trees and coastal Tamarix give large-scale structure, and evergreen shrubs congregate in more sheltered parts of the garden. All this aims to encourage exploration of planting in free-draining lower-fertility materials such as sands and gravels, as opposed to rich topsoils, as we adapt our gardens to an increasingly extreme climate."

Seawilding Garden

Compilation garden images to show RHS Chelsea garden Show 2025 highlights

Elements of the Seawilding Garden designed by Ryan McMahon (Image credit: Tamara Kelly)

The Seawilding Garden had a simple concept at the heart of its design: restoring lost biodiversity. All the plant species incorporated into the scheme are native, each suited to the exposed coastal location of Loch Craignish.

Among the rich array of familiar coastal plants, the garden featured an RHS Chelsea Flower Show first: seagrass. "Seagrass is our marine environment's only flowering plant," explain the design team. "It is a semi-deciduous perennial plant spreading along the seabed via rhizomes. Inconspicuous flowers appear underwater in summer, followed by seeds."

"When I learned seagrass grows in our seas, I was intrigued," says Ryan McMahon, the Seawilding garden designer. "I have since learned about the vital role it plays in our marine ecosystem." By including this vital marine plant, the gardening team hopes to highlight the increasing importance of marine restoration and the need to improve biodiversity for future preservation.

The mix of hardy plants and ragged hard landscaping created a distinctly native garden that felt beautifully imperfect, providing inspirational budget garden ideas aplenty.

Compilation garden images to show RHS Chelsea garden Show 2025 highlights

Further highlights: A brilliantly fun water feature caught my attention; Monty Don's dog-friendly garden; a fun alternative to a hanging basket (Image credit: Tamara Kelly)

Of course, this is just a fraction of the beautiful botanical displays. It feels almost impossible to curate a list of 'favourites', but these were the ones that spoke to me most, by highlighting the importance environmental factors play in shaping our outdoor spaces and how we can adapt to stay ahead.

If you're feeling nostalgic, you can take a look back at my RHS Chelsea Flower Show highlights from 2024 to see how the landscapes are already changing.


Another personal highlight, aside from the incredible array of floral-inspired outfits, was being amongst the RHS visitors and hearing them talk so passionately about the planting schemes and use of materials within the show gardens.

This may be a show with plenty of esteemed attendees, including royalty and celebrities, but it really is a source of great inspiration for all who love their gardens. I highly recommend signing up to visit next year, it's always such a delight.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/homes-news/rhs-chelsea-flower-show-2025-highlights/ MmKp5Go9yfRpG867d23xn3 Thu, 22 May 2025 18:00:50 +0000
<![CDATA[ Can you burn garden waste? Horticulture experts and waste disposal specialists reveal all ]]> It's no big secret that having a fire in your garden to dispose of bulky waste is a pretty common practice. However, what is less known are the rules and regulations that need to be followed when doing so.

After sorting your garden out and trialling one of this year's newest garden trends, you'll probably be left with some garden waste. And while you may have avoided putting things you shouldn't in your garden waste bin, is burning it the best second option?

We've consulted waste and garden experts to unlock the dos and don'ts of burning garden waste on your property.

Can you burn garden waste in your garden?

Getting rid of your garden waste yourself can be a great way of reducing gardening costs throughout the year. Some waste can go into your homemade compost heap, some into the garden waste, but what about the rest? Can you burn garden waste as and when needed?

“It’s safe to burn the majority of dry garden waste materials in your garden, this includes dry leaves, branches and grass, as well as untreated wood, paper and cardboard," explains Ryan Kalia, category manager for waste and recycling at Kingfisher Direct.

It is recommended to use more sustainable garden ideas to get rid of the waste, but these organic materials can be burned as a last resort without having to panic about any repercussions.

picture of paper and wood on fire

(Image credit: Getty Images)

"To burn these materials safely, it’s best to use a metal incinerator, to keep the fire under control," suggests Ryan. "Add your waste gradually to keep your smoke levels to a minimum and always keep water on hand just in case."

He also warns against burning garden waste on a windy day, as this will cause the smoke to spread to nearby gardens and land you with some annoyed neighbours or worse still, it could be a potential fire hazard if embers spread.

Shop garden waste solutions

What garden waste can you not burn in your garden and why?

Aside from neighbourly garden etiquette, there are some things you should not burn in your garden to avoid fines and official complaints.

"The Environmental Protection Act (1990) states that you’re not allowed to burn any waste in your garden that could damage the environment or be harmful to a person's health. For instance, avoid burning damp garden waste, like wet grass or leaves, as it can produce excessive smoke when burned," explains Ryan.

It's also recommended that you avoid burning any treated wood, as this can release toxins into the air.

"Items containing plastic, such as synthetic rattan furniture, plant pots and PVC tarpaulin, are a definite no-go," warns Gareth Lloyd Jones, waste management expert and managing director of HIPPO. "When burned, these can release toxic fumes that can be extremely bad for your health and the environment."

He also points out that burning food waste will create a lot of smoke, too. "And here’s a crucial point: if the smoke from your bonfire drifts across a road and creates a hazard for traffic, you could face a fine – even if you were only burning organic materials. Best to avoid that particular headache," he continues.

FAQs

What time can you burn garden rubbish in the UK?

Although there are somewhat strict rules on what you can and cannot burn, the times you can burn rubbish are a little more flexible.

"Whilst there are no specific legal time restrictions for burning garden waste in the UK, it’s heavily advised to burn garden waste at less disruptive times of the day to avoid being a nuisance to neighbours," says Ryan.

He recommends burning the rubbish in the early morning or evening, as this is when people are less likely to be using their gardens.

"During the day, people tend to hang out their washing or entertain guests in their garden, so smoke and ash can be highly disruptive. In fact, under the Environmental Protection Act, burning garden waste during the day can be classed as a statutory nuisance if it affects your neighbours," he adds.

Do you need a permit to burn garden waste?

picture of rusty incinerator in garden near tree

(Image credit: Getty Images)

You might need permission from the council when changing your garden's design, but when it comes to burning rubbish, a permit isn't always necessary.

"For domestic bonfires, you generally don't need a permit," says Gareth. "However, it’s always worth a quick double-check with your local authority. You might live in a smoke control zone, or there could be other local stipulations you need to be aware of."

It's always best to double-check on your local council's website as to what they do and don't allow.

Can I report my neighbour for burning rubbish?

There's nothing more frustrating when you're trying to make the most out of your outdoor living room, and next door is having the smokiest fire you've ever seen. The smell, debris and look of smoke in your garden isn't exactly enjoyable. But what can you do?

"You have the right to report a neighbour's bonfire if you consider it a nuisance, especially if they are burning rubbish during the day when you are in your garden. Your local council is responsible for looking into any complaints regarding statutory nuisances," explains Ryan.

Gareth echoes this, saying, "Your local council is responsible for investigating complaints, and if a bonfire is deemed a nuisance, they can issue an 'abatement notice." If your neighbour ignores that, they could indeed be fined."


If you have garden waste that you're either not sure how to get rid of or don't have the means yourself, then there are licensed garden waste services you can use. Doing it the right way will save you future headaches from fines and grumpy neighbours.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/can-you-burn-garden-waste-expert-advice/ WAVH9HcYW5ZZpqbHk7Ybmb Thu, 22 May 2025 05:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ 'The King's Rose' wins prestigious award at the RHS Chelsea Flower Show 2025, and it's certainly a showstopper ]]> This year's RHS Chelsea Flower Show 2025 was as spectacular as ever, with the added delight of introducing 'The King's Rose' as the must-have rose variety to grow this summer.

Few timeless garden trends are complete without a captivating rose in bloom, and few are as famous as world-leading rose breeder, David Austin Roses. This new award-winning rose has been created as a tribute to His Majesty King Charles III.

"While every one of our English roses is exquisite and extraordinary in its own right, ‘The King’s Rose’ is particularly special," says David J.C. Austin, Chairman at David Austin Roses.

"It’s our first striped rose, created in collaboration with The King’s Foundation. The rose is a tribute to the enduring values of His Majesty King Charles III through the work of the Foundation, investing in education, sustainable practices, and the revitalisation of heritage."

'The King's Rose' unveiled at RHS Chelsea Flower Show 2025

The royal-worthy new rose has been "12 years in the making, undergoing an exceptionally thorough breeding process at the David Austin Roses nursery in Shropshire", born from a story of great significance.

"I met King Charles at the RHS Chelsea Flower Show in the early ’90s," David explains. "We had a display of ‘Ferdinand Pichard,’ a beautiful striped rose originally bred in France in the early 20th century, and he told me it was the very first rose he’d ever grown. I couldn’t believe it – because it was the first rose that I'd grown, too.

That shared moment has stayed with me ever since, and when I saw this new bloom in the fields — striped, distinctive, and full of charm and character — I knew it had to be the one. It felt like a sign. This had to be our rose.”

a collage image showing new The King's Rose David Austin Roses latest variety on show at the RHS Chelsea Flower Show

'The King's Rose' at David Austin Roses (Image credit: David Austin Roses)

Like King Charles and Queen Camilla, I also attended the famous flower showcase to see the unveiling of the new rose, and I can see why it was part of an award-winning display.

Upon entering the secret garden-themed RHS Chelsea Flower Show stand, my senses were immediately awakened by the sweet-smelling fragrance and colourful display of climbing varieties such as ‘Paul’s Himalayan Musk’, ‘Rambling Rector’ and ‘Ghislaine de Féligonde’.

Beyond that, in the middle of the enclosure was the latest and arguably most prestigious variety to join the much-loved rose family, 'The King's Rose'.

Firstly, I was struck by how markedly different this new variety is from the striking single-coloured roses that came before it. This new variety instantly captivates with its unique, marbled colouring. With no two roses being the same, the painterly petals feel almost hand-decorated and bespoke.

The king's rose Chelsea Flower show 2025

'The King's Rose' on display in the main pavilion at the RHS Chelsea Flower Show 2025 (Image credit: Tamara Kelly)

The next thing that struck me was the gentleness of the fragrance, which, as someone not overly keen on traditional rose scents, was a pleasant surprise.

One of the experts on hand informed me that the light musk fragrance comes from the stamen rather than the petals, which is why the scent feels so mellow compared to stronger rose aromas that you might waft by in the garden.

He also explained how it offers a hint of fresh apple notes, with a beautiful warmth coming from soft clove notes. It is the perfect concoction for those who prefer their fragrant garden plants to air more on the subtle side of rose-scented.

The robust shrub is said to grow to approximately three to four feet tall. The vase-shaped growth habit and heart-shaped leaves, with vibrant yellow stems, make it one of the best plants for pollinators.

King Charles and Queen Camilla at the RHS Chelsea flower show talking to David Austin to see The king's rose

King Charles and Queen Camilla in attendance at the RHS Chelsea Flower Show 2025. being introduced to 'The King's Rose' by David Austin on the Gold Medal-winning stand (Image credit: David Austin | Emma Croman (Rose picture: Tamara Kelly))

I hope King Charles and Queen Camilla's garden will be graced with this stunning new bloom.

It's highly commendable that all proceeds from 'The King’s Rose' will support The King’s Foundation and its work building sustainable communities. So, in many ways, this beautiful new rose is aiding sustainable garden ideas in its own way.


“The Chelsea Flower Show is an incredibly special place for us. It’s where my father first exhibited his award-winning roses back in 1983, and ever since then, introducing a new variety here has become something of a tradition," comments David J.C Austin, Chairman of David Austin Roses.

“Winning our 29th gold medal at the RHS Chelsea Flower Show 2025 is a true testament to the dedication and skill of our entire team. From the growers who nurture each rose to perfection over the 12-year breeding process, to the events team who design a stand that brings the vision to life, this achievement reflects the commitment to excellence that goes into every David Austin rose."

A well-deserved win.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/homes-news/david-austin-the-kings-rose-rhs-chelsea-flower-show-2025/ 43nuTg9TNPPLbykmXrxdyY Wed, 21 May 2025 05:00:20 +0000
<![CDATA[ Can an air purifier help with allergies? We put it to the air treatment specialists ]]> If you consistently suffer from allergies, you'll know all too well how annoying and inconvenient the symptoms can be, even when you're sitting at home. We asked experts if an air purifier could be the key to easier breathing and a restful, allergy-free sleep.

From trying to get rid of dust in your home to trying all the anti-allergy sleep hacks, living with allergies can become frustrating. However, with the right help, there are ways you can make your home a safe space from pollen and other irritants.

One of these possible saviours is an air purifier. In the same way you'd use the best dehumidifier to rid your home of damp, purifiers can help with harmful particles in the air. But can this help your allergies? We've asked industry experts to find out for sure.

Can an air purifier help with allergies?

You might be wondering whether or not buying one of the best air purifiers is going to be worth your money. And if you're an allergy sufferer, you may also be asking if it's actually going to make much of a difference. The short answer is yes, it will.

“For most households, an air purifier can be a real game changer for allergy sufferers. These appliances work by pulling in air from the room, passing it through a series of filters, and then circulating the clean air back out," explains Katie Lilywhite, air treatment expert at AO.com.

She continues, "Most notably, an air purifier equipped with a HEPA (High Efficiency Particulate Air) filter is the crème de la crème – trapping up to 99.97% of particles like dust mites, pet dander, mould spores, pollen or even bacteria."

Using one of these models to remove those pollutants can alleviate symptoms for allergy sufferers. Meaning less sneezing, itching, wheezing and irritated watery eyes.

Will an air purifier help hay fever?

Once spring and summer roll around, it can feel impossible to prevent hay fever symptoms. From the controllable sneezing to itchy eyes, many of us will happily take any help to alleviate symptoms.

“An air purifier is probably the best indoor appliance for managing those pesky hay fever symptoms. Hay fever is triggered by pollen, which can creep into your home through open windows, doors or even by clinging to your clothes or pets," says Katie.

She adds, "A quality air purifier with a HEPA filter can trap airborne pollen before you breathe it in and helps to maintain a clean air environment around your home."

Katie does say that the best way to utilise your air purifier is to run it continuously during peak pollen season. She recommends using it most in the morning and evening when the pollen counts are usually at their highest.

picture of woman turning on air purifier

(Image credit: Getty Images)

Can an air purifier remove pollen?

In the same way, some houseplants can help improve your home's air quality an air purifier can work to decrease the pollen particles in the air.

“Your air purifier can remove pollen, and this is one of its main strengths," says Katie. "Pollen is an airborne allergen which, quite simply, is easily trapped by high-quality HEPA filters."

"Your air purifier draws in air, captures the pollen, and releases fresh, cleaner air back into the room. Remember to run your appliance in the morning and evenings as these are peak pollen hours," she continues.

You can also help your purifier by vacuuming up pollen hiding on your furniture and flooring. Keeping up with daily cleaning habits will make a huge difference in improving allergy symptoms.

FAQs

Does sleeping with an air purifier help with allergies?

Allergies can sometimes be at their worst when you sleep. It's why many experts recommend buying a dehumidifier for your bedroom as well as adding some houseplants that double up as sleep aids. But can an air purifier be a better solution?

"If you regularly wake up with a runny nose, dry throat or any other allergy-like symptoms, using an air purifier whilst sleeping will help," explains Noel Fok, CEO and co-founder of EcoAir. "It will remove pollutants, dust and other small particles from the air, ensuring that you only breathe in clean air."

Look out for models with quiet modes, that way you won't be kept awake by humming noises or beeping.

picture of woman sleeping with air purifier in the foreground

(Image credit: Getty Images)

Which is better for allergies an air purifier or a humidifier?

With the prices of appliances being somewhat on the higher end, you may be debating which one is best for helping your allergies. But when it comes to air purifiers versus humidifiers, there's no real competition.

“A humidifier may relieve allergy symptoms, but prevention is always better than a cure. Using an air purifier will have a bigger impact as it will remove the allergy-triggering particles from the air before they have a chance to cause symptoms," says Noel.

He adds, "Just make sure to keep windows closed to stop other pollutants getting in and ensure the air purifier is able to work as effectively as possible.”

Shop air purifiers


Along with keeping your home dust-free and regularly vacuumed, an air purifier can make a huge difference in removing irritants from the air. This doesn't mean you need to deep clean your home every day, but a weekly run around is highly recommended.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/can-an-air-purifier-help-with-allergies-advice/ KfMUijpauAYvJij2gQhs24 Mon, 19 May 2025 05:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ How to clean a Moka pot correctly: 3 easy steps to a stain-free finish ]]> There's nothing like the smell of fresh coffee in the morning, and hearing your Moka pot bubble away is almost angelic. Which is why it's important to follow this cleaning guide so your Moka pot can keep your mornings caffeinated.

Moka pots are an affordable yet delicious way of upgrading your regular morning coffee. And while nothing will ever beat having one of the best coffee machines to see you through the day, a Moka pot's abilities should never be underestimated.

For the best-tasting coffee, though, you'll want to make sure you're taking care of your Moka pot and cleaning it correctly. Although it's a simple coffee maker, it can quickly fail you if not properly maintained.

How to clean a Moka pot: an easy 3-step guide

Whether you're a newbie to the cafecore trend or have been a caffeine connoisseur for years, Moka pots are a hero in the coffee-making world. Not only do they deliver on strong, delicious espresso, but they do so quickly, quietly and without breaking the bank.

So, how can you keep your pot performing its best for longer? Well, we asked cleaning experts for their advice on cleaning and maintaining it efficiently, without affecting the taste of your morning brew.

Here's what you'll need...

  • Warm water
  • Soft sponge or cloth
  • Washing-up liquid
  • Toothbrush or soft-bristled brush

1. Empty and rinse

picture of woman rinsing out an empty moka pot under the tap

Start with a simple rinse in warm water (Image credit: Getty Images)

After you've finished your coffee and are ready to part with your pot long enough to clean it, the first step is to empty all the chambers.

"Once the pot has cooled, take it apart and empty the used grounds," instructs Catherine Green, sustainable cleaning expert at Smol.

This is a perfect opportunity to try out some ways to use coffee grounds in your garden, as they are rich in nitrogen, which is perfect for enriching the soil.

It's then time to give your pot a good rinse under warm water, which includes the chamber, filter basket and lid. We recommend doing this step after every use, as it can stop you from needing to thoroughly clean the pot so often.

2. Scrub inside and outside of pot

With your pot empty and rinsed, it's time to give it a gentle yet thorough scrub. This needn't be on your daily cleaning habits list, as scrubbing too regularly can damage your pot in the long run. So, only do this when your pot needs it.

"Use a soft sponge or cloth to gently clean all surfaces and, if needed, use a clean toothbrush to scrub inside the filter and around the rubber gasket," Catherine advises.

She adds, "Avoid using washing up liquid or dishwasher tablets on the inside of the pot, especially aluminium models - as it can affect the flavour of your future brews!"

3. Dry thoroughly

picture of moka pot disassembled drying on drying rack

(Image credit: Getty Images)

In the same way you'd thoroughly dry your washing machine after cleaning, reduce the risk of mould and damage, your moka pot needs the same treatment.

"Make sure you dry all the parts thoroughly before reassembling, as leaving water inside can encourage rust or oxidation, especially in aluminium models," explains Henrique Conceicao, Area Manager at Total Clean.

How do you deep clean a Moka pot?

Is your Moka pot in a particularly bad state? When the caffeine addiction has started to affect your pot, then you'll probably need to resurrect it with a safe deep clean. The method is much easier than cleaning a coffee machine, and you shouldn't need to do it that often.

"If your Moka pot starts to smell a bit stale or you notice a metallic taste creeping in, it’s time for a deep clean," says Henrique. This involves cleaning with baking soda.

"You can soak the disassembled parts in warm water with a spoonful of bicarbonate of soda for about half an hour."

Then, he recommends using a soft brush to gently clean around the filter holes and inside the base. After that, just make sure to rinse it all thoroughly and dry completely before putting it back together.

FAQs

How do you remove oxidation from a Moka pot?

If you noticed oxidation on your Moka pot, it'll usually show up as a chalky white residue on the inside, then it's time to give it some TLC.

Henrique says, "You can get rid of it with a gentle paste made from lemon juice and bicarbonate of soda. Rub it on with a soft cloth, leave it for a few minutes, then rinse off and dry. Just don’t soak the pot in lemon juice or vinegar for too long - it’s too acidic and can damage the surface."

Oxidation will more often than not show up on aluminium models; on others, you might never have the problem.

picture of the inside of a moka pot with stains and oxidation

(Image credit: Getty Images)

How to clean burnt coffee off a Moka pot?

Should you have found yourself in a hurry one too many mornings, then chances are you might have some burnt coffee residue in your Moka pot. The solution will depend on how badly burnt the pot is.

"For mild burns, fill the base with water and a spoonful of baking soda, bring it just to the boil, then leave it to cool and scrub gently with a soft brush," says Henrique.

If there are tougher stains, then he warns you might have to do this a few times to break them down, like when cleaning a burnt pan. However, make sure you don't resort to steel wool or harsh scouring pads, as Henrique explains that they'll ruin the finish and make your future coffees taste a little off.

Can you run vinegar through a Moka pot?

Whilst you might have used vinegar to clean your other coffee machines, your Moka pot will probably not be as thankful for this specific cleaning agent.

"No, it’s best not to run vinegar through it like you would with a coffee machine. Especially in aluminium pots, as the vinegar can cause a funny pitting and a metallic taste. Instead, soak the parts in a diluted vinegar solution and rinse everything thoroughly before use," says Catherine.

Cleaning with vinegar can be an effective way of achieving a gentle yet thorough clean, but thanks to its acidity, it can sometimes be more harmful than helpful.


Now you know how to clean a Moka pot; all that's left is to master the art of removing coffee stains around your home to keep everything looking pristine at all times.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/how-to-clean-a-moka-pot-expert-guide/ eVpnPVxBBrrRdmJpxRjxJQ Sun, 18 May 2025 14:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ Easiest flowering plants for summer – 8 pretty picks recommended by gardening professionals ]]> Opting for some of the easiest flowering plants for summer is a wise choice if you're super busy, new to gardening, or simply not that green-fingered. After all, whether you have a few flowerbeds or just a couple of pots in a courtyard, a few beautiful blooms can totally transform a space.

From a low-growing perennial with masses of tiny blooms to tender annuals that provide plenty of cheer for months, there's a reliable and no-fuss plant to suit any garden trend. Even just investing in one or two can make a big difference (and if you're a beginner, this may help build your confidence as you get more familiar with plant care).

I asked gardening professionals for their recommendations on easy bloomers for the warmest season, and below, they share their picks. There are also lots of practical tips on how to help them perform at their best.

8 easiest flowering plants for summer to get growing this year

Now's the time to stock up on some essential gardening tools if you haven't already. As well as a sturdy trowel for planting, you'll need a watering can and a pair of gardening gloves, such as these floral RHS Burgon and Ball ones from Crocus.

1. Erigeron karvinskianus

erigeron flowering on stone wall

With its mass of pink and white flowers, this plant offers plenty of charm (Image credit: Tom Meaker / iStock / Getty Images Plus / Getty Images)

"This cheeky, small, pretty plant with its soft daisy flowers will seed itself in cracks and crevices and romp all over your garden," says garden designer Harriet Worsley, who adds how it has an informal cottage garden look.

Gardening expert Sarah Raven also recommends it (particularly the "Profusion" variety, which is seasonally available from the Sarah Raven website). "The masses of pink daisy-like flowers are perfect for softening garden steps, walls, and patios," she says. Erigeron will flower for months on end, she adds. "It’s a brilliant value plant which no garden should be without in summer."

Upkeep is minimal, as this low-growing perennial is drought-tolerant once established. However, Sarah says that it should be planted in a sunny spot with well-draining soil, and that regular deadheading will encourage growth.

2. Echinacea

green and pink echinacea flowers

Also known as coneflowers, these perennials will help welcome pollinators to your space (Image credit: Photos by R A Kearton / Moment / Getty Images)

Lucie Bradley, a gardening expert from Easy Garden Irrigation, recommends echinacea for our list of easiest flowering plants for summer. "Flowering from as early as June through to as late as October, needing very little maintenance and suffering from hardly any pests or disease, echinacea is a perfect flowering herbaceous perennial for busy gardeners," she says. What's more, they are a great plant for pollinators.

While most commonly seen in shades of purple or pink, these pretty perennials can also be found in white, green, and red. However, Lucie says she always recommends either the pink or purple varieties, such as "Elton Knight", "Rubinstern" (which you can buy from Crocus), or "Ruby Giant", as these tend to outperform the other colours.

"Best planted in spring or early summer, they produce the best blooms when grown in full sun and in any type of soil as long as it is free draining," she continues. "Although you will need to water them in their first year, their long tap roots mean that once established, they can cope with dry soil and perform best when allowed to dry out between waterings."

3. Pelargoniums

white pelargonium flower

A lovely option for brightening a patio (Image credit: Esin Deniz / iStock / Getty Images Plus / Getty Images)

Pelargoniums (sometimes called geraniums) are perfect plants for patio pots. Harriet especially recommends the white varieties, adding how they're easy for window boxes and to pep up borders. They don’t need much care, she says, "just water them once or twice a week". However, she notes that they must be in a sunny spot.

You can also deadhead pelargoniums if you wish, which will neaten up their appearance as flowers fade. This is super easy to do, as the spent flower stems should break off easily from the main stem if you give them a gentle pull.

As they are tender, it's important to bring pelargoniums indoors before temperatures drop – a sunny windowsill is perfect. Otherwise, you can simply treat them as annuals and replace them each year.

Try the "White Pearl" pelargonium from Thompson & Morgan for a trailing variety.

4. Geranium "Rozanne"

This beauty is fast-growing with an abundance of blooms (Image credit: Iva Vagnerova / iStock / Getty Images Plus / Getty Images)

Hardy geraniums are different from the pelargoniums mentioned above, as they can stay out in your garden all year round. As they are herbaceous, they will die back in winter, with new growth sprouting in the spring.

Charlotte McGrattan, hardy nursery stock buyer at Hillier Garden Centres, recommends "Rozanne" – an award-winning variety, for our list, highlighting its deep violet-blue flowers with white centres and maroon veins. "Flowering from early summer to early autumn, geraniums are perfect for adding instant colour to the garden," she says.

Plant "Rozanne" (available from Hillier Garden Centres) in well-draining soil, and remember to water the plants properly while they get established. A layer of mulch around the plant will help to retain soil moisture. They are super versatile and grow quickly, working beautifully in pots, borders, or even as rock garden plants.

5. Bacopa

white bacopa flowers

Use this pretty plant as a "spiller" by planting it around the edges of pots (Image credit: sasimoto / iStock / Getty Images Plus / Getty Images)

Bacopa (also known as Chaenostoma cordatum) is a fabulous and easy-going bedding plant with tiny flowers that brighten summer displays.

"If you’re looking for training foliage and waterfalls of flowers, white bacopa will add a veneer of romantic prettiness to pots, troughs and window boxes," says Harriet. "Bacopa likes sun but also tolerates semi-shade, and the flowers go on, and on, and on. In the city, it may last two years, but in colder areas, it will die off in the winter."

Regular watering and feeding throughout the growing season will help these alluring plants truly thrive. Try the "Snowflake" variety, available from Crocus.

6. Dahlias

orange dahlias in bloom

Dahlias come in a wide range of shapes and colours (Image credit: Alex Manders / iStock / Getty Images Plus / Getty Images)

Learning how to grow dahlias is easier than you might expect and an excellent option if you want show-stopping blooms for displaying indoors.

“For a long-performing flower in summer, you can’t beat dahlias," says Sarah. "The bold splashes of colour that dahlia 'Molly Raven' [from the Sarah Raven website] produces are brilliant, and the Venetian-marbled-paper textures make it a stunning centrepiece with the rich stripes and pink petal base contrasting perfectly against the stems. Support it with a stout stick, making sure to tie it in every couple of weeks."

For best results, you should plant dahlias in moist but well-drained soil, Sarah adds. Somewhere with plenty of sun is also beneficial. Snip off spent flowers to encourage more blooms. In warmer regions, protect the tubers from winter cold by covering the area with a thick blanket of mulch – or, in colder places (or to play it safe), dig the tubers up to keep them somewhere frost-free, then replant them in spring.

7. Nepeta

nepeta flowers

Nepeta is often used as an edging plant (Image credit: Annette Lepple / Alamy Stock Photo)

"A great herbaceous perennial which takes up very little time but brings a lot of benefits to your garden is nepeta – commonly called ‘catmint’ due to its attraction to cats," says Lucie. "Very similar to lavender, nepeta has small lavender-blue flowers (although some varieties are white or yellow) which appear from late spring through to late summer, and attractive greyish-green leaves."

For best results, Lucie advises planting it in soil which has good drainage and where it will get full sun. Keep them well-watered at first. "Once established, these hardy plants can pretty much look after themselves."

Try planting the award-winning "Walker's Low" variety from Crocus to soften the edges of pathways.

Top tip: These plants can be given a "Chelsea chop" to encourage flowering later on in the year.

8. Repeat-flowering roses

The "Olivia Rose Austin®" rose from David Austin Roses (Image credit: David Austin Roses)

“David Austin Roses are renowned for their repeat-flowering varieties, offering an abundance of blooms from early summer right through to the first frosts," says Liam Beddall, senior rose consultant at David Austin Roses. "These English roses combine the beauty and fragrance of old-fashioned roses with the reliability and performance of modern breeding, making them an easy yet elegant choice for vibrant summer colour."

One of his favourites is the "Olivia Rose Austin®", which he says is an exceptional repeat-flowering variety known for its delicate, soft pink blooms and strong fruity fragrance. "It features beautifully cupped petals that open into a classic rosette shape, making it a favourite for both borders and containers.”

"Gertrude Jekyll®" is another of Liam's favourites, which he says is one of the earliest English roses to bloom, producing large, rosette-shaped flowers in a glowing pink for an uplifting display. "This vigorous variety grows into a medium-sized, upright shrub, or can be trained as a climber offering both beauty and structure.”

Our guide on keeping roses flowering for longer will help you get the most from your plants.

FAQs

What are some easy flowering plants for pots?

Many of the easiest flowering plants for summer listed above can happily grow in containers – look for compact varieties for the best results. Just remember to ensure each pot has drainage holes and that each plant has enough space to grow. Water them more often than those in the ground, too, as pots tend to dry out quicker.

For another plant option, consider agapanthus. "This semi-evergreen perennial forms tidy clumps of lush green foliage, topped with rounded heads of trumpet-shaped flowers," says Charlotte. She also notes how it flowers over a long period. Our guide on deadheading agapanthus will help you keep yours neat.

blue agapanthus in flower

Agapanthus do well in sunny pots (Image credit: Thang Tat Nguyen / Moment / Getty Images)

What are some other ways to create a low-fuss summer garden?

One of the best gardening tips to remember is that different plants have different preferences in terms of soil type, spacing, and sunlight. So, it's always worth checking the label before you buy, to ensure you have somewhere suitable where they will easily thrive.

Watering is the other big thing to bear in mind throughout the summer months. Choosing drought-tolerant varieties is beneficial for a low-maintenance garden, although even these often need plenty of water to start with, as they settle into their new home. Mulching your flowerbeds will help keep the soil moist (and also suppress weeds).

On the topic of weeds, note that a carpet of dense ground cover plants can be useful at preventing them from taking a foothold, and there are lots of lovely, flowering options.


Looking to add more beautiful blooms to your garden this year? Our guide to late-summer flowers has plenty of colourful picks to inspire you.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/easiest-flowering-plants-for-summer/ 7kvHqjLzKHn2dQ72jmEMXD Sun, 18 May 2025 10:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ I was always too scared to try the Chelsea Chop, but I've faced my gardening fears and have no regrets ]]> Let's face it; braving the famous Chelsea Chop takes some doing, even if you're au fait with pruning techniques, because it demands that you cut your plants back. Hard. Does it work, though?

Once upon a time, I thought of gardening as something you approached with a kind of reverent hesitation. I’d tiptoe into borders, deadheading plants nervously, and prune only when absolutely necessary, as if I were trimming my own fringe with trembling hands.

I thought any drastic snip might be the undoing of months (or years) of slow, careful growth and established garden trends. That a hard prune would, despite all assurances to the contrary, kill off my beloved plant babies. But then I met my husband.

This is a man who patently is not, as I quickly learned, a tentative gardener. He doesn’t tiptoe: he charges into the garden armed with a pair of secateurs or a pruning saw. I once watched him cut a huge clump of sedum clean in half (at peak growth, no less) while I looked on in horror.

“It’ll be fine,” he said, grinning. “Chelsea Chop. It’ll come back better.”

So, what is the Chelsea Chop? And what are the benefits?

We've all at least heard of the Chelsea Chop, largely thanks to Monty Don's fondness for the Chelsea Chop method, even if we have no idea what it entails. It’s one of those slightly intimidating terms that gets tossed around in gardening circles, usually with a nod to the experts or the ‘proper’ gardeners.

According to Morris Hankinson, founder and managing director of Hopes Grove Nurseries, the Chelsea Chop “is a gardening technique that is usually performed around the time of the RHS Chelsea Flower Show".

"It involves cutting back some herbaceous perennials by about a third to a half. This encourages new, bushy growth and flowering later in the season," he explains, noting that many of these are on the list of essential plants to prune before the end of May anyway.

Countryside garden with res sedum growing to show the benefits of the Chelsea chop

Sedum is one of the plants in our garden to show the benefits of a Chelsea chop (Image credit: Future | Photographs Camilla Reynolds, (Nettle Soup) Giffords Circus)

Sounds simple enough, I suppose. But to someone like me, whose default gardening style used to be “don’t touch it and hope,” the idea of hacking back half a plant felt like a gamble.

Still, I couldn’t deny the results. That aforementioned sedum that my husband chopped? It came back tighter, sturdier, and much less floppy than mine, which decided to do a sideways lean by mid-June.

The thing is, my husband does this to everything. He’s practically famed among our friends for it. He once took my neighbour’s olive trees down by a full third as I watched through my fingers (and she chuckled nervously), but sure enough, they came back bushier and healthier than ever.

It’s definitely a “more is more” approach. Bold, fearless... and annoyingly effective.

The cut one, leave one method

It wasn’t long before I decided to try the Chelsea Chop for myself. Tentatively, at first. I did half an echinacea one year, just to see. It felt like cutting off its hair mid-party. But it worked. I got fresh growth, extra flowers, and a lovely lesson in trust.

“With plants that already have plenty of growth, it can seem counterintuitive to cut them back with shears,” Morris says.

“It may seem a bit harsh, but it’s beneficial, so don’t be scared. If you’d like some flowers sooner, followed by more later, you could give the plant a Chelsea Chop by cutting back half of the plant and see how that compares to the area which hasn’t been chopped.”

That’s exactly what I started doing: one half chopped, one left alone. A cautious experiment that, in time, became a confident habit.

Pruning essentials:

Which plants should have the Chelsea chop?

So, which plants does the Chelsea Chop work best on? According to the Royal Horticultural Society (RHS), it's the following:

  • Achillea (Yarrow)
  • Campanula (Bellflower)
  • Delphinium
  • Echinacea (Coneflower)
  • Eupatorium
  • Helenium
  • Nepeta (Catmint)
  • Phlox
  • Lysimachia
  • Rudbeckia (Black-eyed Susan)
  • Sedum (now Hylotelephium)
  • Solidago (Goldenrod)

"Many other summer- and autumn-flowering perennials can be treated similarly," add RHS experts promisingly.

How and when to Chelsea Chop?

You want to time your Chelsea Chop so it aligns with RHS Chelsea Flower Show (traditionally the third week of May) as this will give them the best chance of a second flush of flowers.

As previously mentioned, Monty Don is a fan of the Chelsea Chop method, writing via his blog that "if you have several clumps of these plants [you should] cut one of them about halfway up the existing growth".

"If you have just one big clump, then reduce just one-third of the plant in this way," he says. "The result will be that the pruned section will produce side shoots bearing extra flowers which will bloom a few weeks later than the uncut growth and extend the display into autumn."

Bee-on-echinacea

Bee on echinacea (Image credit: Future )

Now, each May, I find myself getting oddly excited about what I’ll chop back, and my garden has never looked better. It turns out, the Chelsea Chop isn’t about destruction: it’s about timing, patience, and a little bit of courage.

As Morris puts it: “Don’t be scared. The Chelsea Chop might just surprise you.”


It certainly surprised me. It taught me that sometimes, a strong cut isn’t damage: it’s care. That growth can come from letting go. And those gardens, like people, often flourish after a little reset.

So now, when my husband storms out into the garden with his secateurs and a suspicious gleam in his eye, I no longer gasp. I grab my own and join in.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/chelsea-chop-gardening-method/ srePPtDkxyGErAT2kXDjTU Sun, 18 May 2025 05:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ Are you a good neighbour? These common garden etiquette rules might have you second-guessing ]]> Love them or loathe them, everyone has neighbours. And it can be all too easy to annoy one another, especially during summer when you're both out enjoying your garden. But where exactly is the line between accidental annoyance and fine-worthy inconvenience?

Whether you know the current garden laws or not, some common dos and don'ts come with being a neighbour. Breaking these rules can land you a pretty hefty fine, while others merely make that walk to the car uncomfortably tense.

But what exactly constitutes garden etiquette? And are you or your neighbours unknowingly guilty of breaking it? Here, the home experts describe the rules and the consequences of breaking them.

Are you guilty of breaking these common garden etiquette rules?

If you're sorting your garden out before summer starts or cleaning your BBQ before a big feast this weekend, you might want to brush up on your garden etiquette first.

And if you are the better neighbour, these rules might already ring a bell – perhaps you've been pestering next door about them for years.

1. Completing noisy jobs at certain times

picture of person mowing lawn

(Image credit: Getty Images)

While spring might be the right time to cut your grass after winter, the actual time of day is important to consider, too.

"It’s always considerate to think about your neighbours when carrying out noisy garden work using power tools to avoid any complaints," explains Jon Saeed, managing director of outdoor lighting company Lighting Legends.

There aren't any official laws on this, but all local councils have their own guidelines that you'll need to adhere to. Jon says, "Most councils recommend carrying out noisy work between 8 am and 6 pm on weekdays, and advise avoiding excessive noise outside of those hours."

Of course, carrying out work outside these hours may result in some rather annoyed neighbours, but could also lead to a fine.

"Councils also have the right to investigate noises between 11 pm and 7 am under the Environmental Protection Act of 1990 and can issue a warning notice. Failure to comply can result in a fixed penalty notice fine of up to £110," adds Jon. You can visit www.gov.uk to find your local council details.

2. BBQing with washing out

There's nothing like setting up your outdoor kitchen when the hot weather hits, but the smoke and greasy smell from a BBQ is a little less welcome when you've just hung your clean washing outside.

"Try to be mindful that your neighbours don’t have washing out or that excess smoke isn’t blowing towards any open windows and doors," advises Jon.

"Position your BBQ towards the back of the garden, where it won’t be a nuisance or consider giving them notice before you start your cooking," he continues.

This is also another reason to consider where not to place a pizza oven in a garden.

3. Playing loud music

picture of bluetooth speaker on table outside in the garden

(Image credit: Getty Images)

No outdoor living room set up is complete without a Bluetooth speaker, however, that doesn't mean you can play music at an ungodly decibel.

"If you’re enjoying music in the garden, it's important to be considerate and avoid playing loud music at unsociable hours," says Jon. "If they find your music to be a nuisance, your neighbours can complain, and the council can investigate you under the Environmental Protection Act of 1990."

You can receive a similar fixed penalty notice when you complete noisy jobs outside of appropriate hours. However, Jon points out that if you fail to comply here, you could then be given a noise abatement notice, which can lead to fines of up to £5,000.

"If you're planning to have guests over, give your neighbours a heads up and keep the music at a reasonable level and avoid going past sociable hours," he continues.

4. Breaching garden boundaries

When transforming your garden on a budget, you might want to give your fences, hedges and walls a refresh. But before you start cutting back the best privacy plants, painting or demolishing, it's a good idea to double-check what's officially yours and what isn't.

"Ask your neighbour if you are unsure, or you can also find this information in your title deeds or check with your local council," explains Jon.

Even cutting down a tree that's not technically yours can lead to major disputes and even fines. So always get clarification before you start any work, it'll save you a lot of hassle in the long run.

5. Failing to maintain your garden's cleanliness

picture of rubbish piled up in back garden

(Image credit: Getty Images)

No one wants to look over next door and see piles of rubbish and dying plants. But aside from aesthetic reasons, maintaining your garden can also stop rats from coming into your space.

Jon echoes this, "Mess like discarded rubbish or food scraps, can create an environment for pests like rats, mice, and insects."

Staying on top of outdoor chores is key to both your garden looking the part and avoiding any health and safety risks.

Shop garden maintenance tools


If you're looking to spruce up your space, why not talk to your neighbour about some garden fence ideas? The chances are they'll be happy to join forces and chip in for the new barrier to block your neighbour's view, just make sure you know which side the fence technically stands on before making any decisions.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/homes-news/expert-reveals-common-garden-etiquette-rules/ xfnhxigWwkjgzbMAL6ANcd Sat, 17 May 2025 10:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ 3 outdated garden trends experts say we should be avoiding in 2025 ]]> Is it time to refresh your garden before summer arrives? Before all the new trends send your head spinning, why not start looking at the styles that are on their way out, so that you're way ahead of the game.

Luckily, garden trends aren't as fast-moving as interior ones, and for good reason: garden renovations are no cheap job. However, some styles and looks will slowly fall out of fashion, whether for aesthetic, environmental, or functional reasons.

So if you want to play around with garden design and switch things up, this interior design expert has shared a few trends you might want to avoid.

Whether you're looking to transform your garden on a budget or simply want to try out more sustainable garden ideas, looking at trends can be a really helpful source of inspiration.

In the same way interior design trends fall out of fashion, some garden styles that were once all the rage have become dated and redundant.

Now, that doesn't mean you should go outside and completely rip apart your garden, but if you do like keeping ahead of the curve, you might just want to rethink certain design choices when it comes time to sort your garden out.

1. Artificial grass and harsh mulch colours

artificial grass with red mulch next to it

(Image credit: Getty Images)

For some of us, making our gardens as low-maintenance as possible is more important than how they look. Which is why this faux option can be a popular choice, until you remember that you've got to learn how to clean artificial grass, of course.

"Artificial grass might seem like a low-maintenance solution, but it rarely looks natural and can leave your garden feeling flat and artificial-looking," says Chloe Barrow, a design expert at home and garden emporium Laura James.

She recommends opting for natural grass or mulch, which can blend better with the soil and real planting beds. This turn away from the 'fake' look coincides with the continued success of the meadowscaping trend and rewilding method.

"In terms of colours, try choosing a soft, earthy-toned mulch that mirrors the natural landscape. Avoid bright red or green options as they can look processed and take away from a natural aesthetic," she adds.

2. Patterned tiles and wood decking

Although there's a niche garden theme for everyone, there are some patterns you'll find in most gardens. One of these is wood decking, and yet according to Chloe, this is becoming a style of the past.

"Some garden features like patterned tiles and classic wood decking are quickly falling out of favour. We’re moving towards a softer, more considered approach, where Euro Summer styling meets a new wave of modern maximalism, embracing statement features while still being thoughtfully styled," she explains.

This year, we've seen a massive uptick in people wanting to recreate a Mediterranean paradise in their back garden, as well as more relaxed outdoor furniture.

"I would recommend replacing geometric patterns and tired decking with washed concrete in warm terracotta tones. This instantly modernises the base of your space and works beautifully with sculptural furniture shapes, helping your garden feel more contemporary and easy to style even in smaller spaces," Chloe continues.

3. Monochrome colour palettes

picture of grey decking and black garden furniture

(Image credit: Getty Images)

Looking at the interior paint colour trends this year, the monochromes and dull tones of the past have completely vanished. The same is apparently true in the world of garden design.

"Black and white monochrome has had its moment, because this year it’s all about bold, expressive colour that feels warm and Euro Summer-inspired," says Chloe. "I would recommend working with a palette that plays into the colour wheel, starting with a neutral base and adding in two complementary, yet different tones like cobalt blue and limoncello yellow."

Take the pistachio green trend, for example; these bold yet somewhat muted tones are so easy to incorporate into your outdoor space without overwhelming it.

If you're a little new to colour, then Chloe suggests adding it through smaller finishing touches. She says, "Try dressing your space through colour on cushions, or even hand-painted tinted garden glassware. These kinds of additions are really effective for refreshing your garden without the commitment of a full redesign.”

My favourite colourful buys for summer


Aside from the trends, it can be a nice feeling to give your garden a little makeover before the warm weather hits and you're spending every moment you can in the sun. You can do this all while saving money in the garden, it's simply of matter of using what you've got and only making purchases you truly need.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/homes-news/outdated-garden-trends-2025/ afNUGVXUbdqkJwNYoGDz5Y Sat, 17 May 2025 05:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ Heirloom-worthy home pieces that will never go out of style, from a Le Creuset casserole dish to a classic chess set ]]> We all have seen the family wedding ring that has been passed down generation after generation. Maybe you have a piece of art hanging on the wall that belonged to your mother’s mother’s mother. Or even an antique dining table that you only eat at twice a year for Christmas and Easter.

Not all of these objects will necessarily be at the height of fashion, but they are our way of continuing the memory of our ancestors. They carry huge sentimental value that simply cannot be bought, faked or forced. They’re earned. Here are my very best suggestions for heirloom worthy pieces for your home.

Heirloom Worthy Home Pieces

Cast iron skillet

Cast iron skillet

(Image credit: The Washington Post via Getty Images)

I don’t know if the phrase ‘good things come in small packages’ was ever really true. But what I can be more certain of, is that when I pick up something and it is heavy, it is usually of good quality. In the kitchen at least. There are exceptions, but I know where I’d place my bets if it were a question of durability.

Buy yourself a simple cast iron skillet and start making memories. It doesn’t have to be anything fancy, but Le Creuset is always a very reliable place to invest when we're talking about heirlooms.


Our top Le Creuset picks if you're looking for heirloom-quality cookware...

Picnic hamper

picnic hamper

(Image credit: Dougal Waters via Getty Images)

A classic wicker picnic hamper will always trump all the plastic insulated boxes or cool bags in the world. No matter how warm my food gets, I will forever be smug as I unstrap my plates from their leather holster, and lay out my knives and forks on my tartan picnic blanket. These don’t have to break the bank, they just have to be good quality.

Add the crockery and cutlery yourself and make the ultimate set to pass down from generation to generation. Prepare to be the envy of the beach, park, and street.

Thick wooden chopping board

Breadboard

(Image credit: Mint Images via Getty Images)

When it comes to choosing a chopping board that truly stands the test of time, opt for a hardwood and buy the thickest board possible. If you want to go a step further than a nice homeware store, some wood merchants will cut you up a slab. Then all you have to do is apply a few layers of food safe oil.

If it’s a hardwood, you will be able to sand it down time and time again to give it a refresh, but don’t sand away the soul. There are even chopping boards with resin-filled cracks for a more modern, unique look. Heirloom items are not always perfect, and this is why we love them.

Upright piano

Piano

(Image credit: OR Images via Getty Images)

Most houses have the space for an upright piano. They are essentially a substitute for a side table. You can still line the top with vases and books so no space is wasted and you don’t miss out on your child's hidden musical talent. Even if you don’t have someone musical in the family, you will probably have a guest who is.

Pianos can become the focal point of a room and add soul (if you keep them well tuned). It’s over to you to learn, then pass down the ability to play, as well as the piano itself. What a gift.

Wooden steamer trunk

Steam trunk case

(Image credit: AJ_Wat via Getty Images)

Okay, so whilst your ancestors would have used a steamer trunk as their luggage for a long trip or maybe to go to boarding school, nowadays they probably won’t quite fit in the Easyjet cabin allowance. Instead, they are the perfect place to store board games or really just anything that you'd prefer to keep out of sight.

They are beautiful looking, hardwearing and will always find a place in a future home. If you can buy an antique one it’s likely to outlast anything else more contemporary you can find.

Chess set

Chess set

(Image credit: ivanastar via Getty Images)

Is anyone going to be passing down a third-generation iPad? No. But a beautiful hand-carved chess set? Definitely. Even though gaming consoles are immensely popular, we will always find time for a game of chess on a rainy day or a quiet evening. If your set is only used once a month, it is worth having.

A nice chess set is a timeless piece you can leave out on your coffee table, ready and waiting for willing players to step forth. Some come in marble, some in polished, rich wood; whatever the material, this is a classic.

Champagne glasses

Champagne glasses

(Image credit: Oscar Wong via Getty Images)

I don’t know about you, but I am not drinking champagne regularly. So when the time does come to pop a bottle open, it is essential that your glassware can rise to the occasion. Keep them polished between uses and stored safe and sound in their box. No one should be reinventing their style, no one should be changing their colour. Champagne glasses are here to stay and are the perfect heirloom.

Cut delicately and with a slim stem, these are iconic. Don’t worry about a small chip, little bits like that add to their history.

China tea set

tea set

(Image credit: fancy.yan via Getty Images)

Like champagne glasses, the China tea set will not be coming out for your daily cuppa. Unless you’re royalty. Reserved exclusively for only the fanciest of occasions where de-crusted sandwiches and mini-every-food-you-can-imagine are compulsory. Your tea set should be complete with saucers and sugar pots, although let’s face it, we absolutely do not need them.

This is the type of heirloom that is too nice to throw away, and the epitome of British living. Save it for when the king comes to visit.

Cricket bat

Cricket bat

(Image credit: Alex Walker via Getty Images)

Cricket bat, or baseball bat, you decide. This heirloom is the kind of thing you will play with (gently) a few times when your kids are young. The rest of the time, it will lean up against the wall in your bedroom. The generational story will be that you used to practice hitting with your dad or brother when you were younger, and the cycle will continue.

Since we’re not professionals, and these should be top-quality hitting instruments, they will easily stand the test of time. Your bat of choice will become more and more beautiful as years and stories age it.

Hand press juice squeezer

picture of lemons, juicer and bottle on a striped tray

(Image credit: Future)

If, like me, you are a big fan of orange juice, you probably already have one of these. Substantially easier to clean, quicker to set up, and infinitely more beautiful than their modern equivalent. You know what I am talking about. The big metal arm and the two domes that press together to extract the fresh juice of a citrus fruit. These are heavy, built to last and won’t let you down.

Make sure you wash them between uses and keep them polished to protect against the acidity. But more importantly, so they stay beautiful on your kitchen counter.

Mahogany shoe horn

shoe horn

(Image credit: zhihao via GettyImages)

This is maybe not a show piece, but there is something immensely satisfying about slipping your foot into your dress shoes as you head out for the evening whilst using one. I suggest mahogany because the wood will get more and more beautiful with time.

Glass vase

glass vase

(Image credit: OLIVIER MORIN via Getty Images)

Why glass? Well, a vase is designed to be on show permanently. If it has an ugly pattern, or just a design that doesn’t fit with the room, you will never use it. A good heirloom piece always finds its use, otherwise, it ends up in a charity shop. Glass is inoffensive in all settings and styles.

To really make this fit the bill, seek out an antique vase from legacy brands such as Lalique. If you don’t want to overspend, then try flea markets or go big on size.

Leather bound book

Leather bound book

(Image credit: Aubrey Hart via Getty Images)

I say leather bound book, and that would be best case scenario, but a thick hard back would do the trick too. What goes in? You decide. My favourite two ideas are a recipe book, since dishes are passed down from generation to generation more than any object! And a photo album is a really nice idea too.

On that, I would love to see more people getting their photos printed out in hard copies. It is so much more satisfying to sit down, look through and pass them round, compared to scrolling on a phone. The more scribbles, creases and recipe amendments, the better!

Casserole dish

Casserole dish

(Image credit: Keystone via Getty Images)

Will a seasoned casserole dish impart years of developed flavour into your meals? Probably not noticeably. Will the meals you cook in it inspire you to tell stories of what your parents cooked or burnt for you whilst using it? Absolutely. And this is what heirlooms are all about.

There's a name on everyone's lips, and I have to say it here: Le Creuset. I've had mine for decades, my grandma has a precious one, and I intend to pass mine on to the next generation too.

Whisky glasses

whiskey glass

(Image credit: V via Getty Images)

It’s fair to say that most houses have a drinks cabinet. My parents were into wine, but not spirits. However, when I was a child, our drinks cabinet was full of partially opened bottles of gin, whisky and vodka. I’m sure many people can relate. We never know when there will be the right occasion to drink whisky. Personally, I have never found it, but I want to be ready for when it comes. If I had space for a wing-backed armchair, a box of cigars and a roaring open fire in my cupboards, they would be in the same section as my whisky glasses, too. Alas.

Backgammon set

backgammon

(Image credit: Slim Aarons via Getty Images)

It should be illegal not to own a backgammon set. If nothing else, other than for the pure beauty of the wooden box exterior and interior they come with. I was inspired to buy my own set when I was scrolling through vintage photos of life on the French Riviera. Phones were nowhere to be seen. But what did come up time and time again, was happy duos playing backgammon.

If you only buy the set to bring with you when you go on holiday, I am certain it will be a tradition that will be the start of years of enjoyment.

Poker chips

Poker chips

(Image credit: USA Network via Getty Images)

I have probably played poker five times in my life. But over the many years, those instances have been spread, I have always used the same poker chips from my family's house. These are timeless objects that really come into their own on those few occasions you want them. If you find a really nice set, they will likely last for an eternity. They are also the kind of thing children love to hold, so great for drawing them away from screens!

If you buy a nice set, you'll likely get a good box for them too, which is an heirloom in and of itself.

Bagatelle

Bagatelle

(Image credit: Science & Society Picture Library via Getty Images)

This one is for me personally. Maybe there are some other bagatelle players out there, but it won’t be in the Olympics anytime soon. If you haven’t come across the game, it is essentially an antique version pin pinball, and it provides hours of fun. You can buy a wooden bagatelle board easily online, and I can’t recommend it enough.

It’s such a simple heirloom, so this is something you can prepare to hand down to the next generation. It's so iconic in my family that my cousin had it to play at her wedding.

Wooden fruit bowl

Wooden fruit bowl

(Image credit: NurPhoto via Getty Images)

Will a fruit bowl ever not be a fruit bowl? And will it ever not get used? If you invest in a substantial bowl, it will serve you and everyone else indefinitely. Usually, these aren’t moved around much either, so the potential to break them is limited.

Kilner jars

Kilner jar

(Image credit: Lglass vase via Getty Images)

A kilner jar is maybe not as iconic as a wedding ring. But I can say for sure I have never thrown one away. They have so many uses and are a timeless design. Get a few of these in your kitchen if you haven’t already and prepare for them to become the heirloom that inspires stories of blackberry picking and homemade jam.

In my case, I remember my parents making homemade limoncello after a trip to Italy. In my house, they have oats, flour, and cereal, turning practical storage into a homely display.

Slate cheese plate

Cheeseboard

(Image credit: Boston Globe via Getty Images)

Food looks better on slate. Fact. You don’t need to buy an expensive one from a home store, just buy a piece of slate and treat it with food-grade mineral oil every six months. This stops the slate from getting stained and makes it look stunning.

Bonus tip: If you’re using it to display cheese, then consider buying a piece of chalk so you can label what you're eating directly on the slate and make sure to have some brightly coloured fruit or herbs for some contrast to the deeper, darker colours.

Guitar

Guitar

(Image credit: All Pereira via Getty Images)

Who isn’t tempted to run their fingers along the strings of a guitar when they come within 10 metres of one? Who also doesn’t know how to play a little song or just a few chords? The answer to both. No one. A good quality guitar is an heirloom must.

Buy one, add some stickers of your favourite band, buy a strap that matches your vibe, and bam, an instrument that will be passed down for years to come. It makes a beautiful piece on the wall or in the corner of the room, perfect for some ambience.

Linen tablecloth

Linen tablecloth

(Image credit: Arthur Elgort via Getty Images)

A good quality linen tablecloth will find its place in your cupboard and make rare celebrity appearances a few times a year before heading back to the darkness. It is something we will probably never buy, and never really need. But when it is handed down to us, we will find an opportunity to let it shine.

You can opt for a plain design or get a tablecloth with some delicate interest. My advice would be to keep it simple. If used rarely and stored properly, this will last an eternity.

Metal biscuit cutters

Cookie cutters

(Image credit: Chaloner Woods via Getty Images)

Stars, circles, love hearts, flowers, squares, men, women, trees. Forget the plastic or silicone, metal biscuit cutters are an incredibly affordable heirloom that you can pick up today, and be sure that they will be loved and enjoyed by anyone who finds them. I know I have some in my cupboard that I had when I was a child and they are as good as the day they were made.

You'll be surprised at how often you need them, especially around the holidays when you're baking biscuits for all the family to enjoy

Marble pestle & mortar

Marble pestle & mortar

(Image credit: ortland Press Herald via Getty Images)

I'd suggest marble for this one; it will be much more effective than wood at grinding down whatever comes its way. Again, probably something that you won’t buy, because you’ve never found a time you need it. But when it is passed down to you, it is great to have. I've ended up grinding spices and making dips in this at the last minute and thanked myself for investing in one.

When placed in a kitchen, it says to guests, “I take cooking seriously” and “I don’t need machines to do things for me”. The bar has been set.

Silverware

Silverware

(Image credit: REDA via Getty Images)

There are a lot of Google search results saying that silverware doesn’t actually have to be silver to qualify for the name. To be clear, it is named as such because it was originally made of sterling silver. Nowadays, if you wanted to buy a full set of 12 knives, forks, soup spoons, dessert spoons and teaspoons, it would set you back over £3,000. Probably not a good use of money. Nonetheless, a really nice set of ‘cutlery’ is something that is in budget, and more than deserves its place in the heirloom category.

Roberts radio

Roberts radio

(Image credit: Silverware via Getty Images)

This is another one that is personal to me, but I really think deserves a mention. Wherever my grandma went, she took her Roberts radio with her. Every morning she would lie there listening to classic FM. Like her, I bought myself a Roberts and it sits beside my bed with the antenna up, but nowadays they have Bluetooth, so I use it with my Spotify account instead. These radios will look great forever, and probably keep working forever. They are inexpensive, and in my opinion, are a must have. Thanks Grandma!

Corkscrew

Slate

(Image credit: REDA via Getty Images)

No home is complete without a corkscrew, yet I find so many without them when I am visiting. Or so many with those plastic ones that just don’t cut the mustard as heirloom worthy. If you’re opening a nice bottle of wine, you need the right tools for the job. A proper, top quality corkscrew, ideally with your initials engraved, is the perfect addition to any bar cart.

Cocktail shaker

Cocktail shaker

(Image credit: Bettmann via Getty Images)

A cocktail shaker is a great addition to any house. I don’t think many people are into making cocktails at home, but they should be. A cocktail is like an edible perfume. So much complexity and balance between flavours. Just battling a bad reputation of ‘get drunk fast’. My advice to you is to buy one made of stainless steel; anything that is plated will scratch and tarnish irreparably. Stainless steel can be polished to your heart's content. Ready to be handed down, looking as good as new.

Ceramic mixing bowl

Mixing bowl

(Image credit: H. Armstrong Roberts_ClassicStock via Getty Images)

Life is expensive. I understand why people are likely to buy a plastic mixing bowl instead of a heavy-duty ceramic or enamelled one. It falls to us, and the heirloom list to encourage a wave of people to bring back the family bowl. The bowl that has made a thousand cakes. The bowl that you licked cake batter out of as a child.

I always like a set that stacks with little prep bowls, so you can measure out all of your ingredients before you get your hands busy with your next greatest bake. It's a classic.

Iron fireplace tools

Fire tools

(Image credit: Construction Photography_Avalon via Getty Images)

Iron fireplace tools that are forged in fires and designed to go in and out of them daily are not going anywhere. A good quality set, ideally with brass bristles on the brush, is what I’m talking about here. These are on show permanently, so think timeless, simple design. Make sure you have a nice caddy to store them in that will stay stable when people brush past them, though.

Brass bell

Bell

(Image credit: NurPhoto via Getty Images)

I think parents everywhere are probably shouting at least once a day to call their kids for dinner. Wouldn’t it be easier for everyone if we invested in a nice brass bell? Sure, your kids will turn it against you and start ringing it all the time. But it’s better than you having to ring their phones to get them to come and eat. A bell is the kind of object that finds pride of place on a shelf with other statement objects. They don’t need to have a purpose. They just need to spark a conversation and remind you of the good old days.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/heirloom-worthy-home-pieces/ 2C9mzj5fSmuQigW6nNtkZ3 Fri, 16 May 2025 18:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ Should outdoor plants be watered every day in hot weather? Horticultural experts reveal all ]]> Staying hydrated during hot weather is vital for all living things, including outdoor plants. Therefore, watering your garden plants more frequently during the hot weather is essential, but how much is enough?

While we can experience the odd rain shower during the warmer months, you still need to give your precious plants a helping hand to ensure they thrive throughout persistent spells of hot weather. This is particularly important if you have some of the best patio container plants in your outdoor space.

Below, you'll find useful advice from our team of trusted gardening professionals to ascertain the right frequency for watering your plot when it's hot, including tips on soil types, the difference in types of plants and the best time of day to carry out the job to ensure maximum absorbency.

Should outdoor plants be watered every day in hot weather?

"You should water outdoor plants more often in hot weather, but it depends on factors like soil type, plant maturity, and location," advises professional gardener Jane Dobbs.

If you've recently planted flower seeds in April, take note: "Young plants need daily watering in hot weather to keep their roots moist, especially if the soil dries out fast due to the temperature."

"However, for established plants, watering every 2-3 days is usually enough in hot weather, 4-5 days for normal garden soil, and 6-8 days for clay soil," says Jane.

Our w&h resident garden expert Kayleigh Dray offers her helpful insight: "Plants will need to be watered more regularly in hot weather, but not necessarily every day – unless they’re in a container or a wallside border that restricts their root growth.

Close up of a watering can on wooden decking in a garden to support a guide on should outdoor plants be watered every day in hot weather

(Image credit: Future)

"A good rule of thumb is to push your finger into the soil until it hits your knuckles: if it’s dry all or most of the way through, they need a good drink. Make sure you water deeply at the roots."

Ever conscious of the need to follow sustainable garden ideas, Kayleigh adds: "Be sure to use rainwater (or grey water, if it’s been very dry out) where you can." With the right rainscaping ideas you can greatly reduce your water usage, even throughout the summer months.

And speaking of collecting rain, how does a downpour affect watering outdoor plants in hot weather? A lot of us will be wondering this because, as we know from this week, we still experience bursts of rain in the spring and summer months.

"Definitely no need to water after rain," advises Jane. "Heavy rain typically provides more than enough moisture for the soil, often soaking it deeper than regular watering. Additional watering can lead to waterlogging, root rot, or fungal problems. To be sure, check the soil about 1-2 cm down. If it’s still moist, skip the watering."

When should you water plants in hot weather?

Similar to watering grass seed, timing is everything to ensure maximum results and better efficiency, particularly in hot weather. You don't want to water outdoor plants when temperatures are already high because a lot of the water evaporates before it reaches the roots.

"If there’s been a bout of hot weather, it’s always best to water plants in the early mornings, as this will give them plenty of time to soak up all the water they need before the sun evaporates it all," Kayleigh explains.

"Otherwise, you can water in the early evening, although this can put your plant babies at risk of attack from slugs, snails, and fungal growths," she warns. "Whatever you do, don’t do it in the heat of the day: it’s a waste of water."

A split level garden with raised flower beds with white flowers surrounding a lawn with two white sun loungers

(Image credit: Future | Colin Poole)

Jane agrees, saying: "Early morning is best for watering plants because the temperatures are cooler, which reduces evaporation and allows the water to soak into the soil."

"Late evening watering is the next best thing if morning isn't possible, but don't overwater and don't get water on leaves to prevent fungal diseases."

Tips for watering outdoor plants in hot weather

To ensure your hot weather watering efforts are being done expertly we asked Jane to share her professional tips for dealing with outdoor plants during hot weather...

  • Deep, less frequent watering is better than shallow, frequent watering. "Plants have a better chance of surviving drought with deep watering."
  • Use mulch. 'You can mulch around plants to prevent evaporation and to keep the soil moist." If you are not familiar with the process, you can discover what mulching is and how best to use it with our helpful guide.
  • Reposition potted plants. "To prevent soil from drying out too quickly during the hotter parts of the day, move potted plants to the shade during these hours.
  • Utilise helpful watering methods. "Add water-retention granules to soil or pots to keep moisture levels high."

"The most vulnerable plants to dehydration are seedlings and transplants," Jane warns. So, make extra watering a priority if one of your essential May gardening jobs is establishing young plants that are most at risk.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/should-outdoor-plants-be-watered-every-day-in-hot-weather/ wAuga2fEe6YMUBYVG5CbpB Thu, 15 May 2025 05:00:10 +0000
<![CDATA[ Experts explain why drying your bedding outdoors in summer could potentially be bad for you ]]> The feeling of fresh, crisp sheets dried on an outside washing line is something we all look forward to at this time of the year. But did you know that your outdoor dried sheets could actually be bad for you?

When it comes to ways to dry your bed sheets without a dryer, nothing quite hits the spot like hanging them out to dry on a warm summer's day. And while this will guarantee a fresh-smelling, bone-dry bed sheet, allergy experts explain how your laundry could be soaking up a lot more than the sun.

With allergy season well and truly here, you may want to reconsider your laundry drying routine.

Allergy expert warns against drying your bed sheets outside

If you're unlucky enough to be a seasonal allergy sufferer, then you'll no doubt know all the anti-allergy sleeping hacks to get you through the warmer months. However, this one thing might be sabotaging all your hard work.

"When you hang clothes up outside during high pollen season, they act as a pollen net as fabrics can trap microscopic particles easily, especially in heavier weaves like towels or bed linen," explains allergy expert and Pharmacist, Deborah Grayson.

She continues, "When you bring your laundry inside, you bring those allergens straight into your living space and for sensitive individuals, that’s enough to trigger hours – if not days – of dreaded symptoms."

picture of bed sheets being dried in a long grass garden

(Image credit: Getty Images)

Even the best air purifiers on the market won't be able to help you if you're tucking yourself into a pollen-covered bed every night. So what else can you do to help?

“To avoid this, drying clothes and bedding in a tumble dryer eliminates the build-up of pollen compared to drying outside, as there’s no pollen exposure at all. Drying your clothes outdoors may save on electricity, but for someone battling allergies, the trade-off isn’t always worth it," advises Deborah.

If you don't have a dryer and are looking to make cost-saving swaps, then Deborah recommends drying your laundry outside earlier in the day when the pollen count is lower.

Product marketing manager at Hisense, Chloe Blanchfield, adds to this saying, "One of the most effective ways to remove allergens from clothes, bedding, and towels is to wash them in hot water, which removes particles like pollen. A water temperature of at least 55°C is generally recommended for optimum allergen elimination."

Laundry drying alternatives


While there are various ways to dry clothes indoors, even without a dryer, be sure you're not falling victim to common laundry drying mistakes. Overcrowding your airer or using your radiators can lead to mould issues and damp, musty-smelling laundry.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/homes-news/experts-warn-against-drying-bed-sheets-outside-in-allergy-season/ zgtWCehpgB2siSpojmB6yb Wed, 14 May 2025 05:00:20 +0000
<![CDATA[ This desktop air purifier is perfect for simple, savvy homes - here's why I love it ]]> It’s rare that the words 'fun' and 'air purifier' go together — that’s not me shaming or playing down air purifiers, but they’re rarely attractive and not often bright and colourful. If that’s deterred you from investing in one in the past, you need to take a look at the Tower Desktop Portable Air Purifier.

Hailed as one of the best air purifiers on the market, especially if you’re shopping on a budget, the Tower Desktop Air Purifier offers all the basics that you would need, whilst adding a splash of style and colour to the market.

I put this to the test, on my desk, and in my home to find out whether prettiness and practicality can go hand in hand. Here’s what I found.

Tower Portable Desktop Air Purifier Specifications

Tower Air Purifier on the floor

(Image credit: Future)

Price

£79.99

Dimensions

20.7D x 20.7W x 32.3H 

Weight

2.4 kg

Room coverage

14 m²

Fan speeds and settings

Sleep Mode, 4 speed settings, 12 hour timer

Filters

HEPA

Power

30 watts

Extra features

12 hour timer

Guarentee

3 years

Unboxing the Tower Portable Desktop Air Purifier

Tower Air Purifier unboxed

(Image credit: Future)

The Tower Desktop portable air purifier comes in a simple box. It’s pre-fitted with the filter, so all you need to do is remove the plastic wrap that sits around the HEPA filter and then set it back in place. You’ll get a generous lead to plug your air purifier in with and then the rest is done. Overall, it’s a very pleasing set up.

I always score products on sustainability, which is tricky when it comes to air purifiers. Most of the Tower Desktop Portable Air Purifier’s packaging is recyclable except for the bag around the HEPA filter, which could go in a soft plastic recycling, if you made the effort. From what I’ve gathered, this is the most effort that a brand can make, so the Tower has set itself off on a brilliant foot.

Who would the Tower Portable Desktop Air Purifier suit?

Tower Air Purifier on the floor

(Image credit: Future)

The Tower Portable Desktop Air Purifier is perfect if you're shopping for a budget, but stylish air purifier. This won't break the bank and you'll still notice different result in your air quality. It's rare that any air purifier looks as good as the Tower too, especially around this price point.

The Tower is also brilliant if you want an air purifier in a smaller room, such as an office or bedroom. It's designed to be used in smaller spaces and you'll see that it works brilliantly in compact rooms. If you have high ceilings and an open-plan living space, you might need something a little more robust.

What is the Tower Portable Desktop Air Purifier like to use?

Top of the Tower Air Purifier

(Image credit: Future)

All the Tower Desktop Portable Air Purifiers controls sit on top of the appliance. The top screen lets you choose different bright lights and you can use the touchscreen to navigate between four speed settings with the option of a quiet sleep mode as well as a 2 - 12-hour timer. You won’t get the feedback that more expensive air purifiers offer, for example, if you wanted to monitor air quality, you would need to buy a separate appliance. You just have to trust that the Tower is doing its job.

I have a series of tests that I run air purifiers through to test how good they are. Often, I match them with their room size and capability because it’s not fair to over stretch them. The Tower is recommended for rooms that are maximum 14m², so I sat this in my office and used it whilst I was working. Day to day, I don’t have many habits that would pollute my room, except that I like to have a candle lit at almost all times. I had mine burning and I also blew it out to see how effectively this could remove smoke from the air. What’s cool with the Tower Air Purifier is that I actually watched it almost suck the smoke out of the air. It didn’t have time to leave any smoky smell in the room because it was almost gone before it appeared.

Tower Air Purifier next to its filter

(Image credit: Future)

The same happened when I sprayed dry shampoo two meters away from the Tower Air Purifier. I have to say, the smell stayed in the room a little longer, lingering for about two minutes, but after that, it was a clear room. I tested whether I could speed things up by cranking the speed from a slow base setting (which runs around 36 dB) up to the fastest speed setting, which is much louder at 47 dB. It did wick the dry shampoo straight out of the air again, which never gets old, but this isn’t something that I would to run regularly.

When I took this into the kitchen to test out the Tower beside my toaster while I burnt some toast (on purpose) and baked a cake (obviously on purpose too). My kitchen is a much bigger room — it’s open plan with high ceilings — so I didn’t expect to see the same quality of air temperature regulation. As expected, this did the best that it could, but without being set up for success, it’s difficult for the Tower to achieve consistent results. It took twenty one minutes for the smell of burnt toast to leave my kitchen, which is a relatively long period of time. Without the air purifier, it would probably have taken an hour, with the window open, it would have needed a similar amount of time. I don’t have to pay to have my windows open, so if you’d be buying the Tower for a big room, here’s an example of why it might not be for you.

The same applied for the air quality when j baked bread. I have another air purifier that monitors changes in air quality so I ran this while I baked bread. I watched the air temperature drop to 72/100 and let the Tower run on its maximum speed. I didn’t get back up to 100 for two hours, by which point I think the bad particulates had probably dispersed themselves around my home and hopefully out of the door. This isn’t a criticism of the Tower, because I stretched it beyond its means, but it’s a standard test that I use for all the air purifiers that I test, so it’s only fair to put the Tower through the same process.

Tower Air Purifier lit up in pink

(Image credit: Future)

With that in mind, I kept this in either my bedroom or my office where I could enjoy the subtle, background cleaning on offer from the Tower. Its quiet model only clicked 23 dB on my monitor, making it easy for me to set a 8 hour timer and sleep with my air purifier running.

While I was working, I enjoyed the vibrant lights that are on display on top of the Tower. It’s a real treat and a nice way to add ambiance to a room with what is essentially a very functional appliance.

Cleaning and the filters on the Tower Portable Desktop Air Purifier

Base of the Tower Air Purifier

(Image credit: Future)

The Tower comes with a pre-filter to remove dander, a HEPA filter for your bacteria and viruses, and then a carbon filter for odours. This is an impressive triad that actually look after each other really well. The pre-filter is useful for protecting the other two filters so that you can keep using them for longer. I didn’t find that this needed cleaning often, even though my house is both dusty and ruled by a big dog. Nonetheless, Tower recommends cleaning it every fortnight or month. You can see how much build up there is on your pre-filter and let that guide you. The HEPA filter will need replacing every 6-8 months if reviews are anything to go by. I’ve not yet used this for long enough to need a refill, but am reliably informed that these last around the standard amount of time and the same applies for the carbon filter too.

The touchscreen needed daily dustings, which says more about my house than the air purifier, but it’s nonetheless worth noting. It’s a really sensitive screen, which is great, but it will show off every last fingerprint.

How does the Tower Portable Desktop Air Purifier compare?

Tower Air Purifier being tested alongside all the best air purifiers

(Image credit: Future)

Desktop air purifiers have been very trendy recently, so they’re no longer boxy, ugly appliances that you wouldn’t dream of showing off. Next to the Tower, one of my favourites is the Vitesy Eteria. This boasts the same power and range as the Tower, but it’s even smaller. I’ve compared it to the size of a water bottle. It’s generally around £30-50 more than the Tower, but you make the money back in the long term. The filters are washable and so endlessly reusable and you get access to a clever app that tells you all about your air quality, with more detail than air purifiers that are two, three, and four times the price.

That’s not to say that it smashes the Tower out of the park. The Tower is easy to control and very simple, whereas the Vitesy Eteria is all app-based, which plenty of people don’t like. You also have the added bonus of the lights on top of the Tower — it’s really stylish.

Alternatively, if you have a bigger room and you need more feedback on your air quality, you can’t beat the Shark NeverChange. This has an on-screen monitor and powerful motor that works well in rooms with high ceilings. It’s not as attractive, but it offers more robust work.

Should you buy the Tower Portable Desktop Air Purifier?

Tower Air Purifier on the floor

(Image credit: Future)

If you want a small, simple air purifier, the Tower is perfect. It’s stylish, quiet, and effective in bedrooms and offices. If you need more space or you have high ceilings, you might need to invest in something a little bigger.

How we test

Tower Air Purifier next to its box

(Image credit: Future)

We've established a rigorous and set procedure for how we test air purifiers at woman&home. Not only will we break down the filter type and components, we'll talk about some real-life examples of how well it works and which contexts are the best for making good use of yours.

I like to run air purifiers through the most common household tasks that pollute your air: burning a candle, making toast, using dry shampoo, and cooking. I do these in different rooms and also make sure to use the air purifier at night, so I can test how quiet it is.

If you're interested in learning more about the process, you can take a look at our dedicated page for how we test air purifiers.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/tower-portable-desktop-air-purifier-review/ VouPT3zKwUTnPfMtZCDBr4 Mon, 12 May 2025 05:00:00 +0000
<![CDATA[ I've never been excited about a doormat before, but Ruggable just changed my mind ]]> Having just moved into a new flat, I'm on a mission to infuse my space with personality, without the hassle of hammering nails into walls or ripping up carpets. It’s a challenge, but I think I've finally found my secret weapon: Ruggable.

I’ve been a Ruggable enthusiast for years. The brand strikes a perfect balance between embracing bold, on-trend rug designs and offering timeless classics. Their collaborations are equally impressive — the Royals' choice, Sanderson, anyone? So, when I heard about their new summer collection, my interest was instantly piqued. But what I didn’t expect was how quickly I’d become completely obsessed with their doormats.

There are three standout designs I simply have to share. Not only are they an effortless way to bring a touch of summer style to your home, but they’re also perfectly aligned with the nautical trends dominating the high street this season. If you're looking to introduce chic, seasonal style right at your doorstep, the answers are at the tips of your toes.

About Ruggable's The Great British Garden Party Collection

Ruggable Striped Rug

(Image credit: Ruggable)

Of course, the doormats aren't the only parts of Ruggable's summer collection that I've been admitting. The new designs, all available as runners, area rugs, and doormats, capture different elements of the season. They've taken inspiration from the English Countryside, a Scandinavian Lakeside, and a Moroccan café.

Speaking on the Summer collection, Ruggable’s Senior Marketing Director, Charlotte Ford said; “With hopefully warmer days upon us, we wanted to put out a range of new designs that would not only be perfect for summer, but let the sunshine into your home all year round with expressive, vibrant colour at the heart of it. But, as ever, we wanted to bring our durable versatility, allowing customers to embrace their style without forgoing practicality - whatever the weather brings us.”

My favourites from Ruggable's The Great British Garden Party Collection

Ruggable Lobster Doormat

(Image credit: Ruggable)

I should add a disclaimer before I introduce you to these special doormats. I grew up by the sea, so coastal style has a special place in my heart. However, judging by the reaction of all my urban friends, this kind of style captures all that free spirited freshness that the coast is awash with anyway.

I think nautical doormats are a perfect way to introduce a touch of coastal charm without overwhelming your space. I love how they effortlessly capture that breezy, seaside feel, creating an instant sense of calm and relaxation the moment you step inside.

The subtle stripes, rope motifs, or ocean-inspired hues can add a refreshing pop of pattern and texture to an otherwise neutral hallway or porch, making it feel more inviting. Best of all, they work seamlessly with a wide range of décor styles — whether you're embracing a full coastal look with rattan furniture and seashell accents, or you just want a hint of that vacation vibe in an otherwise modern home. Nautical doormats are versatile, stylish, and a subtle reminder of sunny escapes, even on the rainiest of days.

These are, of course, just a snippet of what's on offer in Ruggable's new collection. I've picked out three of my favourite rugs, but I could have filled the page with my favourites. They're all so gorgeous.


Ruggable Outdoor Rug

(Image credit: Ruggable)

If you can't tell, I really love this whole collection. If I could afford another house to fill with rugs, I would have done it yesterday just to get my hands on these. I've seen my fair share of Ruggable collections over the years, but this has to be their best yet. And, if anyone I know is reading this, I really love those doormats. And I also really love surprise presents.

]]>
https://www.womanandhome.com/homes/homes-news/ruggable-summer-collection-launch/ yTajpWMhBB2NWBkAdeeCEd Sun, 11 May 2025 15:00:00 +0000